ingles tecnico
TRANSCRIPT
Unidade 1 – O inglês como língua franca e sua necessidade
para o profissional administrador
• Aula 1 -
Língua Franca, você sabe o que é isso?
Introdução
Oi! Como vai você? Está pronto para começar um estudo muito interessante e importante
para você?
A partir de hoje vamos iniciar o estudo do inglês técnico, uma disciplina fundamental para o
seu desenvolvimento como profissional. Antes da prática do inglês, é indispensável, porém, que você
conheça um pouco sobre o processo que tornou a língua inglesa a mais utilizada no mundo dos
negócios de hoje.
Nesta aula inicial vamos estudar a definição de língua franca através de uma abordagem
histórica das primeiras línguas francas e das mudanças linguísticas ocorridas nos últimos tempos,
tudo isso com o propósito de mostrar a importância da língua inglesa no mundo globalizado.
Objetivos
Entender o que é uma língua franca e por que ela é tão importante na sociedade atual, dando exemplos.
De acordo com o Dicionário On Line de Termos Linguísticos, língua franca é: “Língua de
que se servem os falantes de uma comunidade multilíngue para poderem comunicar entre si.” (AIT,
2010)
Para exemplificar essa definição, imagine o seguinte:
• um francês negociando mercadorias com um chinês;
• um italiano em uma entrevista de emprego com um árabe;
• um espanhol dando uma palestra para um alemão.
Como você acha que eles se comunicariam? Por meio de qual código verbal? Ou melhor,
qual idioma seria utilizado nessas conversações? Escolha uma das opções abaixo:
a) Francês
b) Espanhol
c) Italiano
d) Português
e) N.D.A.
Ponto para você, aluno esperto, que marcou a última alternativa! E sabe por quê? Porque o
idioma utilizado no mundo todo, em qualquer tipo de comunicação entre nativos de vários idiomas é
o INGLÊS.
Por ser o idioma adotado em todos os países para a comunicação, seja na área acadêmica ou
profissional, o inglês é de extrema importância. O fenômeno da globalização e a expansão da cultura
americana como potência socioeconômica tem feito o inglês se expandir por todo o mundo. Mas isso
não foi sempre assim, você sabia?
Desde o episódio da Torre de Babel, que relata o
surgimento das línguas com base no mito da construção da
Torre, quando os homens receberam de Deus o castigo de
falarem línguas diferentes para que
FIGURA 1 – A diversidade de idiomas
Fonte: Site DW- World
não se entendessem, deparamos com o problema da comunicação entre pessoas que falam diferentes
idiomas.
Por muito tempo, durante o Império Romano, o grego foi a língua franca do oriente, enquanto
o latim era a língua franca do ocidente. E as duas eram as línguas mais faladas em todo o mundo. Por
volta do século VII, o árabe ocupava o papel de língua franca na maior parte da Ásia, África e em
partes da Oceania, tendo sido utilizado das Filipinas ao Senegal.
Com o passar do tempo, já no século XV, e com as exigências da comunicação para o
comércio entre países com diferentes idiomas e a expansão marítima à época dos descobrimentos,
com destaque para Inglaterra, França, Portugal e Espanha, grandes potências da época, os países
dominantes impunham-se culturalmente sobre os países conquistados. No pacote, óbvio, o domínio
de alguns países sobre outros se exercia também no campo da linguagem.
Durante algum tempo, nos séculos XV e XVI, também o português foi uma língua franca na
África e na Ásia, quando da exploração dos mares da África, América, Ásia e Oceania. Exemplo
claro disso é o nosso português, filho do português de Portugal e ensinado a nós desde os primeiros
anos da colonização pelos primeiros padres jesuítas que aqui aportaram.
Contudo, com a chegada de franceses e ingleses aos portos recém-descobertos pelos
portugueses, a competição terminou com a vitória dos últimos a chegar, logo exercendo seu domínio,
o que culminou também com a substituição do idioma português. Coitado do Colombo, não é? Não
adiantou ter descoberto a América...
Logo em seguida, a língua franca passou a ser o francês, considerado a língua de pessoas
importantes como os aristocratas e diplomatas da Europa a partir do século XVII. Até hoje o francês
ocupa certo lugar de destaque em alguns países que não a França, inclusive emprestando palavras a
outros idiomas (ex.: em português temos o balé, o abajur, o buquê e muitas outras). Também o
alemão foi utilizado especialmente para negócios em grande parte da Europa durante os séculos XIX
e XX.
Porém foi no decorrer da Revolução Industrial, durante a qual se acreditou que as máquinas
viriam a substituir o trabalho dos homens, que o domínio inglês se exerceu sobre o mundo, através
de diversas conquistas geográficas; o idioma inglês foi ensinado pelo mundo afora nas colônias
inglesas, incluindo entre elas uma que viria a se destacar e se tornar referência em termos de
desenvolvimento, poderio econômico, tecnológico e militar, os Estados Unidos.
Apesar disso, foi só após a Segunda Guerra Mundial que esse domínio se consolidou, assim
como consolidou-se também o idioma da terra do Tio Sam, desbancando o francês. O inglês adquire
então status de língua franca, e as culturas inglesa e norte-americana se fazem conhecidas em todo o
globo. É mole ou quer mais?
Ainda assim, nos dias de hoje, não só o inglês ocupa o papel de língua franca. Vários outros
idiomas são utilizados em outras partes do mundo. Por exemplo: o russo na região da antiga União
Soviética, o Hindi na Índia e o japonês no Japão, entre outros idiomas. Porém a mais utilizada na
comunicação em todo o globo é, de fato, o inglês, principalmente no mundo dos negócios
internacionais e na diplomacia (apesar de não ser a maior em número de falantes nativos).
No mapa abaixo, podemos observar dados do site Bab.la (FIG. 2) sobre os idiomas mais
falados no mundo e a porcentagem de falantes, o que nos dá uma ideia da diversidade de idiomas e
dos locais onde eles são considerados línguas oficiais (entenda-se por língua oficial o idioma adotado
pelo governo nas esferas legislativa, executiva e judicial). Pode-se observar também no mapa que o
inglês é tido como idioma oficial em 4 dos 5 continentes, enquanto o português aparece com menos
destaque.
Apesar disso, você sabia que o nosso idioma é o quinto mais falado do mundo? Para sua
informação, além de Portugal e do Brasil, o português também é utilizado em países do continente
africano e da Ásia. Em países como Angola, Moçambique, Timor Leste e Macau (China), o
português é língua oficial, sendo falado ainda em outros países como Andorra e Namíbia, entre
outros.
FIGURA. 2 – Os idiomas e porcentagem de falantes no mundo
Fonte: Site bab.la Disponível em: http://pt.bab.la/noticias/idiomas-do-mundo.html. Online. Acesso em: 27 maio
2010.
Veja na TAB. 1, a seguir, os países onde o português é a língua oficial e a quantidade
estimada de falantes desses países:
TABELA 1
Países onde o português é a principal ou uma das línguas oficiais
País Número de falantes
1. Brasil 190 milhões
2. Moçambique 21 milhões
3. Angola 16 milhões
4. Portugal 10 milhões
5. Guiné Bissau 1.5 milhão
6. Timor Leste 1 milhão
7. Guiné Equatorial 0.5 milhão
8. Cabo Verde 0.5 milhão
9. Macau 0.5 milhão
10. São Tomé e Príncipe 157.000
Fonte: Palestra de Jack Scholes, 2009.
A dica já foi dada com relação ao número de falantes nativos do português na TAB. 1. Agora
é a sua vez de tentar combinar os idiomas e a respectiva quantidade de falantes nativos deles. Vamos
lá? Lembre-se de que contam somente as pessoas nascidas e falantes do idioma local.
Atividade – Ligue os idiomas numerados abaixo com a quantidade de seus falantes nativos.
1. Alemão a) 1 bilhão de pessoas
2. Árabe b) 350 milhões de pessoas
3. Bengali c) 340 milhões de pessoas
4. Espanhol d) 300 milhões de pessoas
5. Hindi e) 250 milhões de pessoas
6. Inglês f) 180 milhões de pessoas
7. Japonês g) 170 milhões de pessoas
8. Mandarim h) 145 milhões de pessoas
9. Português i) 120 milhões de pessoas
10. Russo j) 95 milhões de pessoas
Ao terminar essa atividade, consulte as respostas na parte inferior direita desta página.
Surpresas?
Pois é... Apesar de muito utilizado na comunicação e de ser uma língua franca, o inglês ocupa
somente a 3ª colocação no ranking dos idiomas com mais falantes nativos, atrás do mandarim e do
espanhol. Você sabe o motivo desse resultado? É simples! Ele se deve ao fato de a população da
China ser a maior do mundo e, quanto ao espanhol, somam-se os nativos da Espanha com os de
vários países da América Latina e outros, justificando o número de falantes dos dois idiomas.
Então, dando continuidade à nossa teoria, temos o inglês em 3º lugar, com 340 milhões de
falantes nativos, ok. Quanto ao outros falantes do idioma, que fazem com que o inglês seja
considerado língua franca, eles podem pertencer a duas outras categorias:
1- falantes nativos de países onde o inglês é uma das línguas oficiais. Ex.: África do Sul,
Canadá, Austrália, etc., também chamada de ESL – English as a Second Language (Segunda
Língua);
2- categoria que inclui falantes de países onde o inglês não é adotado como língua oficial.
Ex.: Brasil, França, Chile, etc. denominada EFL – English as a Foreign Language (Língua
Estrangeira).
Seja como segunda língua ou como língua estrangeira, pelos fatores históricos
culturais e sociais já mencionados nesta aula, podemos então concluir que há falantes
de inglês no mundo todo devido à difusão desse idioma. Portanto, para nos
comunicarmos com pessoas de diversos outros países, o caminho mais simples é,
sem dúvida, o inglês.
Resumo
Bom, nesta aula vimos, através de números, a quantidade de falantes nativos de inglês no
mundo e os motivos pelos quais o inglês é considerado língua franca e idioma extremamente
utilizado em tempos de globalização. Espero que tenha ficado claro o quão importante esse idioma é
para você e que isso seja um meio de motivação para o seu aprendizado. Nosso lema então será: Fale
inglês e administre o mundo!
Até a próxima!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Arca Universal, Blog. “Salada de Idiomas.” Disponível em:
http://blog.arcauniversal.com/2009/07/08/salada-de-idiomas/ Online: 08 jul. 2009. Acesso em: 27
maio 2010.
Associação de Informação Tecnológica. Dicionário de Termos Linguísticos. Disponível em:
http://www.ait.pt/recursos/dic_term_ling/index2.htm Acesso em: 24 maio 2010.
Bab.la. “Idiomas no mundo.” Disponível em: http://pt.bab.la/noticias/idiomas-do-mundo.html.
Online. Acesso em: 27 maio 2010.
Re
spo
sta
s: 1 j)
, 2 d
), 3
g),
4 b
),
5 f)
, 6 c
), 7
i), 8
a),
9 e
) e
10
h)
Bortoletto, Galaor. “Entenda o que é língua franca.” Disponível em:
http://www.galaor.com.br/lingua-franca/ Acesso em: 25 maio 2010.
DW-World. Inglês: Língua franca no local de trabalho. Disponível em: http://www.dw-
world.de/dw/article/0,,1813069,00.html Acesso em: 26 maio 2010.
Scholes, Jack. “Native-like fluency.” Palestra de Jack Scholes no auditório da Faculdade Isabela
Hendrix, em Belo Horizonte, em 19 jun. 2009.
Schütz, Ricardo. O Inglês como Língua Internacional. English Made in Brazil
<http://www.sk.com.br/sk-ingl.html>. Online. Acesso em: 26 maio 2010.
Schütz, Ricardo. "Monolinguismo, o analfabetismo dos tempos atuais. English Made in Brazil
<http://www.sk.com.br/sk-monol.html>. Online. Acesso em:11 set. 2004.
Unidade 1 – O inglês como língua franca e sua necessidade
ao profissional administrador
• Aula 2 - A importância do Inglês para os Negócios
1 Introdução
Tudo bem contigo? Animada para o nosso Inglês instrumental?
Objetivo
Entender como o inglês pode propiciar uma carreira bem sucedida no trabalho.
Bom, na pauta da aula de hoje temos a discutir como o inglês é imprescindível ao trabalho do
administrador. Por que saber uma língua virou requisito para conseguir uma oportunidade de
emprego nos dias atuais? É o que vamos ver nesta aula!
Depois de tantos dados vistos na primeira aula legitimando o inglês como língua franca e
como uma das mais faladas em todo o mundo, sendo que é língua oficial em 53 países e tem milhões
de falantes em todo o globo, vamos hoje estudar o status do inglês na sociedade e no mercado de
trabalho.
Há muitos anos observamos muitos pais insistindo e obrigando seus filhos, crianças e
adolescentes, a estudar inglês, muitas vezes em escolas particulares. Por que eles acham que é
importante que os filhos saibam outro idioma? Dê sua opinião abaixo:
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________
Bom, não se tem uma resposta única e correta, uma vez que vários fatores devem ser levados
em consideração, mas uma das possíveis razões está no fato de que, se pararmos para pensar, com o
advento da tecnologia, temos os PCs (personal computers), CDs (compact discs), notebooks, alguns
de nossos aparelhos celulares mais recentes possuem bluetooth (transmissor de dados) e várias
pessoas, adultos, adolescentes, crianças, se comunicam e se expressam através de um blog (diário
virtual) ou web Messenger (tipo de programa pelo qual enviamos e recebemos instant messages ou
mensagens instantâneas, etc., artifícios e utensílios amplamente utilizados em diversas áreas, seja
para trabalho ou lazer.
Por falar em lazer que tal parar um pouco a leitura do nosso livro de inglês e ir dar uma volta
no shopping center para comprar um jeans novo e comer um sandwich ou um hamburger? É
importante ter, no decorrer do dia, algumas horas de folga e diversão, uma vez que o nosso cotidiano
já tem stress o suficiente. Muitas pessoas, mesmo os workaholics (pessoas viciadas em trabalho –
work em inglês) gostam de, após o serviço ou a happy hour, chegar em casa após essa “hora feliz” e
assistir no home theater a um reality show que nem o Big Brother para relaxar, não é verdade?
Você, meu caro aluno, reconhece essas palavras em itálico, não é? Elas não fazem parte do
nosso vocabulário original em português, porém pertencem a uma enorme lista de palavras e
expressões já amplamente utilizadas no nosso cotidiano. Já estamos, de certo modo, familiarizados
com essas expressões porque elas e muitas outras de origem principalmente inglesa estão presentes
na nossa escola, nas ruas, nas lojas, nos restaurantes e em inúmeros estabelecimentos e lugares,
principalmente no nosso trabalho. Como exemplo disso é só observar as seguintes palavras:
designer, manager, network, merchandising, internet banking, etc.
Podemos encontrar essas palavras nos jornais, em marcas de roupas e itens de vestuário e de
inúmeros objetos e acessórios, em nomes de estabelecimentos e em atividades como o volleyball.
Agora é a sua vez. Para mostrar o quanto essas palavras e expressões vindas do inglês fazem
parte da sua vida, peço que você complete o quadro abaixo com algumas palavras e/ou expressões
estrangeiras (leia-se inglesas) com as quais você frequentemente se depara no seu dia a dia e que não
têm tradução para o português como os exemplos que vimos acima. Caso você não se lembre, faça
uma pequena pesquisa na internet:
Além dos fatores sociais, econômicos e históricos já mencionados aqui, a presença do inglês
em nosso cotidiano deve-se também à abrangência da cultura norte-americana bem como da cultura
britânica em todo o mundo, assim como ao efeito da expansão de muitas empresas multinacionais
impulsionadas principalmente pelo efeito da globalização e da internet (rede internacional de
comunicação), fatos estes que fazem com que informações circulem pelo mundo afora em um curto
prazo de tempo.
Com o advento da tecnologia cada vez mais avançada no mundo globalizado e a grande
possibilidade de conversar, ter notícias e comunicar-se com pessoas de todo e qualquer lugar do
mundo, a língua inglesa vem ganhando cada vez mais espaço e importância também no mundo dos
negócios. O amplo uso deste nosso objeto de estudo este semestre pode ser confirmado através dos
livros publicados nas mais diversas áreas do conhecimento humano.
É possível confirmar isso com uma simples visita à biblioteca da escola. Lá você verá que a
grande maioria dos livros científicos de inúmeras áreas é escrita em inglês por ser essa a língua mais
Sale,
acessível a grande parte do público leitor. Ricardo Schütz, professor e pesquisador do ensino de
inglês, em um artigo com o título de O Inglês como Língua Internacional (2009, online), afirma que
“[...] há estimativas de que 85% das publicações científicas do mundo; 75% de toda comunicação
internacional por escrito, 80% da informação armazenada em todos os computadores do mundo e
90% do conteúdo da Internet são em inglês”.
Além disso, é cada vez maior o número de empresas e estabelecimentos como escolas e
universidades nas quais é possível presenciar e participar de conferências online, reuniões a distância
nas quais a única ferramenta necessária é um computador conectado à internet. Para o profissional
que já tem fluência em inglês, é possível fazer cursos universitários a distância, até em outros países,
recebendo, ao fim do curso, certificados internacionais de cursos acadêmicos de pós-graduação,
mestrado, doutorado e afins.
Assim como a FEAD, diversas faculdades hoje em dia oferecem a opção de curso a distância,
possibilitando o estudo estando o aluno em qualquer lugar do mundo. É possível também assistirmos
a palestras, seminários e aulas, como você está fazendo hoje, quebrando a barreira de tempo e de
espaço e facilitando a vida de quem tem uma rotina corrida como suponho que seja a sua, não é?
Schütz (2009, online) diz ainda que
Ao assumir este papel de língua global, o inglês torna-se uma das mais importantes ferramentas, tanto acadêmicas quanto profissionais. É hoje inquestionavelmente reconhecido como a língua mais importante a ser adquirida na atual comunidade internacional. Este fato é incontestável e parece ser irreversível. O inglês acabou tornando-se o meio de comunicação por excelência tanto do mundo científico como do mundo de negócios.
Com isso, Schütz reforça sua tese de que o saber uma língua estrangeira é fator contributivo
para a formação escolar e acadêmica, sendo também uma ferramenta bastante útil em todos os
campos de trabalho e que representa o poder de se posicionar e participar ativamente como cidadão
ativo neste nosso mundo globalizado, e estas são características de um indivíduo que fala um
segundo idioma, o que ele considera ser um fator determinante para se obter sucesso pessoal e
profissional.
A imagem abaixo exemplifica o que Schütz pensa sobre o que o aprendizado do inglês pode
proporcionar nos dias de hoje:
FIGURA. 1 – Proficiência em inglês
Fonte: SHUTZ, 2009, online.
Voltando ao carro-chefe de nossa aula, é importante observar que, apesar da relevância da
língua falada, nem sempre esta foi o meio de comunicação mais efetivo e importante.
Desde a “invenção” da linguagem para a comunicação, seja através de símbolos gráficos ou
de sons, a invenção da escrita, a partir dos primeiros símbolos gráficos e desenhos na pedra, tem um
status de extrema importância na cultura mundial. No mundo de hoje é fácil comprovar essa
afirmação. Pense bem, o que melhor garante que um contrato seja cumprido em uma transação de
negócios?
a. Um acordo verbal ou
b. um acordo por escrito?
Apesar de a fala ser muito importante, especialmente para aqueles que a utilizam como
ferramenta de trabalho (vide os políticos, por exemplo), é na escrita que são registrados contratos,
eventos, notícias, leis e tal. Daí vem a importância de se saber ler e escrever.
Assim como até bem pouco tempo atrás os analfabetos eram socialmente excluídos e
menosprezados, hoje temos os analfabetos digitais – aqueles que não sabem lidar com a tecnologia e
utilizar telefones e computadores modernos – que defendem o direito à inclusão digital,
principalmente para famílias de baixa renda.
É com base nisso que acredito podermos associar o status do analfabeto ou do analfabeto
digital ao não saber ou não ter em seu currículo uma segunda língua, pois uma pessoa que não
consegue interagir com pessoas de outras culturas e com valores diferentes também não tem a
habilidade de se expandir socioculturalmente como indivíduo atuante em uma comunidade de
falantes.
Em seus estudos, Ricardo Shutz (2004) discute o fato de alguém se comunicar através de uma
única língua, denominado por ele monolinguismo, como um tipo de analfabetismo do século XXI,
sendo considerado também fator de exclusão social, uma vez que ter o domínio de outro idioma abre
portas tanto no mercado de trabalho quanto na vida, em termos de possibilitar comunicação em
qualquer lugar do mundo.
Hoje em dia, em muitas empresas vemos que é cobrado como pré-requisito nas seleções de
emprego ou nas contratações, que as pessoas saibam pelo menos uma língua estrangeira, geralmente
o inglês. Às vezes esse conhecimento de uma língua estrangeira assume caráter eliminatório nessas
seleções. Inclusive os recrutadores mais exigentes demandam fluência em inglês de acordo com o
cargo pretendido pelo candidato.
Resumo
O objetivo dessa aula foi demonstrar as vantagens de estudar e de saber inglês nos dias de
hoje, uma vez que o status desse idioma, como língua falada no mundo todo, pode ser bastante
favorável nas esferas pessoal, profissional e acadêmica da sua vida. Com isso, caríssimo aluno,
espero que esteja preparado e motivado para começar nossos estudos práticos desse idioma na nossa
próxima aula! Lembre-se, o Inglês será a sua ferramenta para administrar o mundo!
Até breve!
ATIVIDADE
Olhe ao seu redor, no seu caminho para o trabalho ou para a escola. Veja o quanto você está cercado
pela língua inglesa. Faça uma lista, principalmente com palavras das quais você não conheça o
significado e pesquise. Anote todas e faça um caderno de vocabulário. Mantenha-o sempre
atualizado.
Até a próxima!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Scholes, Jack. “Native-like fluency.” Palestra de Jack Scholes no auditório da Faculdade Isabela
Hendrix, em Belo Horizonte, em 19 jun 2009.
Schütz, Ricardo. "O inglês como língua internacional." English Made in Brazil
<http://www.sk.com.br/sk-ingl.html>. Acesso em: 3 jun. 2009.
Schütz, Ricardo. "Monolinguismo, o analfabetismo dos tempos atuais." English Made in Brazil <http://www.sk.com.br/sk-monol.html>. Acesso em: 11 set. 2004.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 3rd Lesson
Saying hi and greeting!
Aim (OBJETIVO)
Tomar contato com o uso do inglês em situações cotidianas.
Conhecer as principais saudações e cumprimentos.
Conhecer vocabulário do dia a dia.
Introduction
Hello, student! Como vai você?
Fine (+)? So so (+-)? Ok?
Você sabe o que dizemos em inglês ao conhecer pessoas novas? E ao reencontrar velhos
amigos? Ao chegar ao trabalho? Ao entrar numa sala de reunião? E para agradecer ou dizer: - De
nada!? É o que veremos hoje...
Have a nice ☺ class!
Hi! I am Ana Célia and you? What’s your name?
My name is _________________________.
Welcome to English Class!!!
Speaking
A. ( 2 ) Hello!
Hi! What’s your name?
My name’s Anna. And you?
I’m Phillip! Nice to meet you!
Nice to meet you too!
B. ( ) Hi!
Good morning Joana!
Good morning Beth! How are you!
I’m fine, thanks. What about you?
I’m very well! Thank you!
C. ( ) Excuse me!
Can I help you?
Yes, please. Where can we get a taxi?
Over there!
Thank you very much!
You’re welcome!
D. (…) Good afternoon!
Hi, I have a reservation for 3 nights.
What’s your name, please?
My name’s is Julia Robertson.
Just a minute, please. Your room is 263.
Thank you, Sir!
-
1. Associe as
figuras com as conversations acima. Put a number (1, 2, 3, 4…) in the parenthesis.
Your photo
2. Nas conversations acima temos exemplos de linguagem formal e informal e expressões de
significado equivalente. Preencha o quadro abaixo:
Formal
Hello!
My name’s...
Thank you! What about
you?
Very well!
Informal
Hi!
Para cumprimentar, temos também: good morning até 12h; good afternoon de 12h– 6h
p.m. (after = depois, noon = meio-dia); good evening de 6h p.m. (post-meridian ou após o
meio-dia) em diante. Para se despedir à noite, diga goodnight. O oposto de p.m. é a.m. (anti-
meridian ou antes do meio-dia).
Listening
1. Assista ao video legendado (with subtitles) do Site Real English:
http://www.real-english.com/reo/1/unit1.html
2. Complete the sentences below according to the video:
a. Pleased to ________________ you.
b. How ______________ you doing?
c. What’s your ________________?
d. ______________ to meet you two.
e. ________________ name’s Helen.
f. Good to see ______________ guys.
g. ________________ are you?
Grammar
I am Susan. You are ... We are Brazilian. They are the
Rolling Stones.
He is Bill Gates. She is Angelina
Jolie. It is a computer.
As palavras grifadas nas frases acima são conhecidas como pronomes pessoais ou
personal/subject pronouns e servem para substituir nomes ou substantivos (sujeito). Ex. Angelina
Jolie is an actress. She is very famous (Angelina Jolie = She). Os personal pronouns do inglês são:
I
You
He
She
It
We
You
They
Obs.:
• O pronome I é sempre escrito com letra maiúscula;
• I, you, he, she e it são pronomes no singular, sendo que he, she e it são a terceira pessoa do
singular, porém com usos diferentes: he para masculino, she para feminino e it para coisas,
objetos em geral e animais. O plural de he, she ou it é o pronome they.
• Não há diferença entre you no singular e no plural, geralmente o contexto indica o número.
Ex.: You are a (=one) student (singular) e You are students (plural).
1) Use the correct personal pronouns to complete the phrases below.
Example: ___ often reads books. (Lisa) Answer: She often reads books.
a. __________ is in the bank. (Jorge)
b. __________ are on the wall. (the posters)
c. __________ are in front of the TV. (my
mother and I)
d. __________ is green. (the car)
e. __________ is running. (the dog)
f. __________ are in the garden. (the
flowers)
g. __________ is on his bike. (Tom)
h. __________ is from Bristol. (Victoria)
2) Chose the correct form of am/is/are.
a. It_____________ cold today.
b. I_____________ at home now.
c. They_____________ Korean.
d. She _____________ an actress.
e. My name _____________ Jane.
f. We _____________from Brazil.
g. Mario _____________ OK, thanks.
h. You _____________ 20 years old.
As palavras utilizadas para completar o exercício nº 2 acima são o verbo To Be conjugado no
presente. Esse verbo é muito importante, pois, além de significar ser ou estar, ele tem a função de
auxiliar da língua inglesa e passa as frases para a forma negativa e também para a interrogativa. A
forma mais comum de se usar o verbo to Be é usando contrações, conhecidas também como short
forms ou forma abreviada na qual suprimimos uma letra. Para isso usamos a (‘) apóstrofe.
Para transformarmos uma sentença em negativa, devemos somente acrescentar a palavra not
após o verbo. Vamos colocar isso em prática nas formas afirmativa e negativa das frases seguintes.
Veja os exemplos:
Affirmative form (Short) Negative form Negative form (Short)
I’M at home now. I am NOT at home now. I’M NOT at home now.
You’RE 20 years old. You are NOT 20 years old. You AREN’T 20 years old.
He’S ok. He is NOT ok. He ISN’T ok.
She’S an actress. She is NOT an actress. She ISN’T an actress.
It’S cold today. It is NOT cold today. It ISN’T cold today.
We’RE from Brazil. We are NOT from Brazil. We AREN’T from Brazil.
You’RE students. You are NOT students. You AREN’T students.
They’RE Korean. They are NOT Korean. They AREN’T Korean.
Já para a forma interrogativa, vamos inverter a ordem da forma afirmativa. Sempre que temos
uma pergunta que começa com um auxiliar (AM / IS / ARE), vamos ter duas opções de resposta: Sim
ou não, yes or no, respectivamente. Ex.: Are you from São Paulo? Yes, I am / No, I’m not. Veja os
exemplos abaixo:
Interrogative form ( + ) Short answer ( - ) Short answer
AM I … ? Yes, I AM. No, I’M NOT.
ARE YOU … ? Yes, YOU ARE. No, YOU AREN’T.
IS HE … ? Yes. HE IS. No, HE ISN’T.
IS SHE … ? Yes, SHE IS. No, SHE ISN’T.
IS IT … ? Yes, IT IS. No, IT ISN’T.
ARE WE … ? Yes, WE ARE. No, WE AREN’T.
ARE YOU … ? Yes, YOU ARE. No, YOU AREN’T.
ARE THEY … ? Yes, THEY ARE. No, THEY AREN’T.
Obs.:
• Nos exemplos acima é possível observar que não são usadas as short forms em respostas
curtas afirmativas. Ex.: Yes, You’re.
• Outra opção para a forma negativa é usar he’s not / she’s not / it’s not ao invés de he isn’t /
she isn’t / it isn’t e you’re not / we’re not / they’re not em lugar de you aren’t / we aren’t /
they aren’t. Ambas as formas são corretas.
• Lembre-se de que as perguntas em inglês são feitas com o uso de auxiliares ou com as Wh-
questions no começo das frases. Ex.: What’s your name? Are you from São Paulo?
3) Complete the table with the missing sentences and use the contractions if possible:
Affirmative Negative Interrogative
I I’m at the office.
You You’re a businessman.
He He isn’t working hard.
She Is she an intelligent person?
It It’s an information desk.
We Are we in the reception?
You You aren’t American.
They Are they the managers?
4) Answers the questions in English. Circle the correct form.
a. Are you from England? - Yes, (I am / I are / I is).
b. Is she a journalist? - Yes, (she am / she are / she is).
c. Are your colleagues at work? - Yes, (they am / they are / they is).
d. Is the telephone ringing? - Yes, (it am / it are / it is).
e. Are we in room 8? - Yes, (we am / we are / we is).
f. Am I a good boss? - Yes, (you am / you are / you is).
5) Finish the answers using the correct forms of to be (am, are, is). Use short forms if
possible.
Example: Is he a teacher? - No ____________.
Answer: Is he a teacher? - No, he is not. or No, he isn't. .
a. Are they new here? - No,______________ .
b. Is your office big? - Yes,______________ .
c. Are you from Scotland? - Yes,______________ .
d. Is your car green? - No,______________ .
e. Are the DVDs in this box? - Yes,______________ .
f. Is Henry in his room? - No,______________ .
g. Are you football fans? - Yes,______________ .
h. Is Tom's boss in the kitchen? - Yes,______________ .
i. Are Dan and Sue at home? - No,______________ .
j. Is the computer working? - Yes,______________ .
Pronunciation
Em inglês temos sons diferentes do português e que são muito importantes para aprendermos
esse idioma uma vez que a separação de sílabas é feita considerando os sons, e essa divisão é
importante em diversos aspectos da língua inglesa. Você verá que em um dicionário também
encontramos, além das definições de palavras e expressões, a pronúncia, e é para entender como
pronunciar e separar palavras em inglês que vamos estudar os sons.
As vogais são representadas por 20 sons e as consoantes por 24. Um bom website para
verificar a classe gramatical e pronúncia de palavras, caso você não tenha um dicionário de inglês, é:
http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Hoje veremos os sons de algumas vogais:
/�/ = it, this, is
/�:/ = he, she, me
/��/ = name, they, today
/��/ = hi, nice, my
1) Tente achar nesta aula palavras que têm sons que rimam com os sons acima:
/�/
/�:/
/��/
/��/
Outra opção de site que pode auxiliar no seu estudo de pronúncia é o site Say
Expressivo.com. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Online. Você deve digitar a palavra e
clicar em “Read”.
Ao deparar com uma vogal como /�:/ os dois pontos à frente da vogal mostram que esse é
um som longo, demorado para se pronunciar. As letras que correspondem ao som vão estar sempre
grifadas para que você os associe como nas palavras acima.
Como um exemplo de pronúncia vamos observar a palavra business = /�bǺz.nǺs/. O ponto ou
um traço separa as sílabas e podemos ver que business tem duas; e a apóstrofe (‘) indica qual é a
sílaba tônica ou sílaba forte, que chamamos em inglês de stress. Em inglês, por causa da semelhança
de pronúncia que existe entre algumas palavras, essa sílaba stressed é importante para que não haja
mal-entendidos. Por exemplo, temos o substantivo coffee /�kǤ.fi:/ (café) que tem a pronúncia
parecida com a do verbo cough /kǤf/ (tossir).
2) Where’s the stress? Underline the stressed syllable in these words:
a. airport
b. computer
c. e-mail
d. hotel
e. information
f. internet
g. market
h. station
i. taxi
j. telephone
k. ticket
l. toilet
3) Use the words of exercise above and write C for words related with Communication
and T for words related with Travel. (Use as palavras do exercício acima e escreva C
para as que se relacionam com comunicação e T para as que se relacionam com
viagem.)
Vocabulary
Numbers 1 to 1.000
1) Complete with the words in the box: 2) Now, put the number according to
the words:
______ twenty-one
1 one ______ thirty
2 two ______ thirty-seven
3 three ______ forty
4 __________________ ______ forty-two
5 __________________ /����/ ______ fifty
6 Six ______ fifty-three
7 __________________ ______ sixty
8 eight /���/ ______ sixty-four
9 nine /��/ ______ seventy
10 ten ______ seventy-nine
eighteen – eleven – four – five – nineteen
seven – thirteen – twelve – twenty
11 __________________ /�’l�v/ ______ eighty
12 __________________ /�����/ ______ eighty-eight
13 __________________ ______ ninety
14 fourteen ______ ninety-six
15 fifteen /���’��:/ ______ a hundred / one hundred
16 sixteen ______ one hundred and five
17 seventeen ______ two hundred and thirty-seven
18 __________________ ______ a thousand / one thousand
19 __________________ ______ two thousand and ten
20 __________________ /�����/ ______ three thousand
Obs. Ao falarmos números de telefone, endereços ou quarto de hotel, por exemplo, podemos dizer oh
(pronuncia-se ôu) ao invés de zero. E quando houver dois números iguais em sequência, podemos
dizer double antes do número, marcando que ele está em dobro. Ex.: 31 312334400, dizemos three-
one-three-one-two-double three-double four-double oh.
Para porcentagem utilizamos a palavra point. Ex.: 23.45 = twenty-three point four five per
cent. Ao escrever, a virgula (comma) indica milhares. Ex.: 5,678 = five thousand six hundred and
seventy-eight.
How do you say “tchau” in English?
Bye. Goodbye.
See you later. See you.
Goodnight. See you on Saturday.
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
Days of the week and months of the year
1) Complete with vowels (a, e, i, o and u). Para isso pesquise em um calendário em inglês
ou na internet. Procure decorar os dias da semana (week).
Days of the week:
M___nd___y
T___ ___sd___y
W___dn___sd___y
Th___rsd___y
Fr___d___y
S___t___rd___y
S___nd___y
Obs. Em inglês temos os weekdays e o weekend. Em quais dias você trabalha? Esses são os
weekdays. No weekend (geralmente 2 dias) você não trabalha, just relax. Diferente do português,
TODOS os dias da semana são escritos em inglês com letra maiúscula (capital letters).
Months of the year (meses do ano). Faça a mesma pesquisa para os meses do ano (months).
J___n___ ___ry
F___br___ ___ry
M___rch
___pr___l
M___y
J___n___
J___ly
___ ___g___st
S___pt___mb___r
___ct___b___r
N___v___mb___r
D___c___mb___r
Resumo
Nesta aula você estudou bastante vocabulário e expressões utilizadas para cumprimentar as
pessoas, para se apresentar e para iniciar conversações em inglês, bem como vocabulário de
números, dias da semana e meses do ano. Pratique as atividades propostas, mas também utilize a
internet como ferramenta de estudo. Você pode criar seu próprio caderno de vocabulário – que pode
ser virtual – e deve também pesquisar e procurar novos exercícios. Practice makes perfect!
See you soon!
Ana Çélia
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074. Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em: 23 out.
2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 4th Lesson
•
Have a seat, please!
Introduction
Good morning, Good afternoon or Good evening!!! How are you?
Nesta aula de hoje vamos trabalhar com vocabulário referente a objetos e apresentações.
I hope you appreciate it! ☺
Speaking
Aim
Compreender palavras e expressões de sala de aula e objetos de trabalho. Aprender como se apresentar e dar informações pessoais.
address - cell - e-mail - from how - phone - postcode student - surname - your
1) Look at the form below:
First name: John
Surname: Smith
Country/ City: USA, Chicago
Student √ Yes No
Age: 27
Address: Washington St. 1030
Postcode: 60606
E-mail address: [email protected]
Phone number: 312 345 6789
Cell phone: 312 9012 3456
2) Complete the questions to get this
information. Use the words in the box:
1. What’s your first name?
2. What’s your _______________?
3. Where are you _______________?
4. Are you a _______________?
5. _______________ old are you?
6. What’s your _______________?
7. What’s your _______________?
8. What’s your _______________ address?
9. What’s your _______________ number?
10. What’s your _______________ phone?
Obs.:
• Usamos o verbo to be para falarmos nossa idade. Ex.: I’m 25, he’s 38, etc..
• Postcode ou zipcode do exercício acima são conhecidos em português como __ __ __.
• Para falarmos nosso e-mail em inglês utizamos a @ (at), o . (dot) e _ (underline).
• Cell phone, cellular phone and mobile phone are synonims.
Pronunciation and Listening
Você conhece o alfabeto em inglês? As letras são as mesmas, mas a pronúncia... quanta
diferença!
A B C D E F G H I
J K L M N O P Q R
S T U V W X Y Z
1) Listen and repeat the sounds (Vá ao endereço eletrônico seguinte, ouça e repita tudo que
lá houver para ser repetido. Faça isso quantas vezes forem necessárias para você fixar a
pronúncia correta das palavras):
http://www.ngfl-cymru.org.uk/vtc/ngfl/ngfl-flash/alphabet-eng/alphabet.htm
2) Os sons agora estão agrupados de acordo com a pronúncia. Acrescente à tabela, as
letras que estão faltando:
3) Let’s practice with abbreviations like: CD, DVD, USA, PC, VIP…
4) Circle the letter that doesn’t rhyme:
a. A D J K b. B E P O c. C F S X
d. G I T V e. H L M N
Vocabulary
1) Look at the pictures and match the sentences. (Ligue as frases à imagem correspondente)
a) b) c) d)
e) f) g)
/��������/ /����:/ /����/ /��������/ / / /����:/ /����:/
A B F ____ O Q R
____ C L Y ____
J ____ M W
____ E ____
G S
____
____
____
____
Z
( ) What’s its name? ( ) Sorry. Our telephone is not working!
( ) Your car is new! ( ) My country is the biggest in South America.
( ) What’s his business? ( ) Where are their receptionists?
( ) What’s her name?
Grammar
Look at the chart:
Subject
Pronouns
Possessive
Adjectives
I my
you your
he his
she her
it its
we our
you your
they their
Let’s practice!
2) Choose the correct word to complete the sentences.
_________ name is Luis Alberto. (he her his)
_________ e-mail address is [email protected]. (I my its)
They’re the Moreau’s, _________ surname is French.
_________ house is big and confortable. (her she it)
_________ children are in pre-school. (you he our)
This is my favorite pen. _________ colors are black and green. (it its it’s)
Congratulations! _________ family is so beautiful! (your it’s you)
Reading
1) Read the sentences about Belo Horizonte in Brazil.
1-Belo Horizonte is the capital of Minas Gerais.
2-Belo Horizonte is a modern city in Minas Gerais.
3-Belo Horizonte is an important city in the state.
I live in a big town in Minas Gerais. I like there because it’s nice and exciting! The city where
I live is young, it’s just 113 years old. All my family lives and works there: my father is a teacher,
my mother is an architect and my brother is an engineer student.
Writing
1) Use o texto acima como exemplo para escrever um texto sobre a cidade onde você mora.
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Grammar
Can you explain the uses of the articles in the sentences above? Ok, I’ll help you!
Indefinite articles Definite articles
A I study in a Law school. (Existem
outras escolas de direito e ele estuda em
uma delas e é a primeira vez que a
menciono).
An I study in an Administration
school. (Existem outras escolas de
administração e ele estuda em uma
delas, mas aqui o curso inicia-se por som
de vogal)
* We use indefinite articles with jobs.
The The Administration school where
I study is called FEAD. (Só existe uma
escola denominada FEAD e eu já havia
me referido a ela antes).
1) Can you explain the use of articles?
The in sentence 1 ______________________________________________________
A in sentence 2 ________________________________________________________
An in sentence 3 _______________________________________________________
A/a in sentence 4 _____________________________________________________
Observe the examples:
Fonte: Educarede Fonte: Wired Fonte: Minas de ouro Fonte:Paper crave
-What’s this? -What’s that? -What are these? -What are those?
-It’s a radio. -It’s a box. -They are radios. -They are boxes.
Você notou que this e that são pronomes demonstrativos no singular e que these e those são no
plural? Você sabe por que se usa um ou o outro? Temos duas categorias para classificá-los, a saber:
singular/plural e perto/longe do ouvinte (em relação ao objeto).
THIS: singular objeto perto do ouvinte
THESE: plural
Como você classificaria that e those?
THAT:
THOSE:
Now, look at these words:
Column 1 Column 2
Singular Plural Singular Plural
radio radios box boxes
cd cd’s brush brushes
boy boys bus buses
city cities match matches
• O plural em inglês é formado em sua maioria pela adição da letra –s, como podemos observar
na coluna 1.
• Por outro lado, na coluna 2, temos algumas exceções. Em palavras que terminam em s, x, sh e
ch, acrescenta-se –es. Por fim, as palavras que terminam em y, como boy e city?
boy boys city cities
-y precedido por vogal -y precedido por consoante
2) Practice, make the sentences below plural.
a. The radio and the television are broken. __________________________________________
b. I have a big box to put in the bus trunk. ________________________________________
c. The pretty girl likes her beautiful toy. __________________________________________
• Remember: adjectives don’t have a plural form!
3) Now, match the office/classroom objects to the pictures and write the plural form.
(1) backpack _____________
(2) bin __________________
(3) board ________________ ( ) ( ) ( )
(4) book _________________
(5) calculator _____________
(6) chair _________________ ( ) ( ) ( )
(7) computer desk _________
(8) eraser ________________
(9) marker _______________ ( ) ( ) ( )
(10) paper clip ____________
(11) pen _________________
(12) pencil _______________ ( ) ( ) ( )
(13) secretary _____________
(14) stapler _______________
(15) table ________________ ( ) ( ) ( )
Reading
1) Read the text below and write the correct
information about John:
First name: _________________________
Last name: _________________________
Place of work: ________________________
Job: ________________________________
Age: ________________________________
Marital status: ________________________
Wife’s name: ____________ Job: _________
Girl’s name: _____________ Age: ________
Boy’s name: _____________ Age: ________
Writing
1) Now, write your own profile:
Hi! My name is James Johnson but my friends
call me Jimmy. I’m 40 years old and I’m a
manager in New York. I work for a big
company and I sometimes travel to other
cities. I’m married to a Brazilian girl named
Elisa. She’s a teacher, and we have 2 kids.
This is my family. These are my two kids.
Their names are Louisa and Victor. Louisa is
12 and Victor is 9. Nice to meet you!
Resumo
Hoje você viu como são dadas informações pessoais e também aprendeu a descrever objetos
através do uso de artigos, adjetivos de posse, pronomes demonstrativos e aprendeu o gênero de
alguns substantivos em inglês. Uma vez que você viu como se apresentar em inglês, faça um teste!
Converse com alguém que sabe inglês e coloque em prática os diálogos da nossa aula. Vale a pena
tentar! É importante que no seu tempo livre você se mantenha em contato com a língua inglesa e faça
exercícios relativos à matéria. Se sentir dificuldade, peça ao seu tutor sugestões de atividades extras,
pois é praticando que se aprende! Think about it!
Bye, bye!!!
Ana Célia Lima
Viviany Gomes Pontes
Meninas, o que vocês acham de fazer um glossário ao final de cada aula com as palavras novas,
principalmente aquelas que entram nos comandos dos exercícios? Por exemplo: below, match, own,
profile, etc. (Em ordem alfabética, é claro.)
REFERÊNCIA
National Grid For Learning . The alphabet. Online. Disponível em: http://www.ngfl-
cymru.org.uk/vtc/ngfl/ngfl-flash/alphabet-eng/alphabet.htm. Acesso em: 12 set. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 5th Lesson
Activities & Hobbies
Introduction
Hi! How are you?
Hoje vamos falar sobre você, seus costumes, hábitos... O que você faz no seu dia a dia? Onde
trabalha? Onde mora? O que faz em seu tempo livre? Esses são os tópicos sobre os quais
aprenderemos bastante nesta aula!
Let’s go!
Reading
Aim
Aprender como dar pequenas informações sobre hábitos, atividades e hobbies, utilizando expressões e verbos em contextos do cotidiano.
Meu prezado aluno, tente ler o texto seguinte, ainda que você sinta dificuldades para fazê-lo. É muito importante que você tente. Você ficará surpreso com o que vai descobrir a respeito de você mesmo! Assim espero ...! Women and Children in Poverty - Global Conventions On The Rights Of Women And Children, Progress Toward International Goals, The Feminization Of Poverty “Women are poorer than men because they are often denied equal rights and opportunities, lack access to assets, and do not have the same entitlements as men. They also carry the burden of reproductive and care work and represent the majority of unpaid labour.” —United Nations Development Program, Gender and Poverty Reduction “The quality of a child's life depends on decisions made every day in households, communities and in the halls of government…. As children go, so go nations. It's that simple.” —UNICEF Executive Director Carol Bellamy. Virtually all groups that study poverty—from international organizations like the United Nations and the World Bank to small local charities—agree that the most effective way to reduce it is to improve the social, economic, and political situation of women and, by extension, children. Women's levels of health, education and security reflect those of their families. When a mother suffers the effects of poverty, future generations of her family do as well, creating a cycle of impoverishment from which it is very difficult to escape.
Fonte: Library Index Website, 2010.
E então, leu tudo? Está surpreso com a quantidade de palavras que você achava que não conhecia,
mas que conseguiu reconhecer muito bem? Agora vamos analisar o que você entendeu.
• Ao se deparar com textos como este, você descobrirá que várias palavras são parecidas com
palavras em português. Ex.: information. Essas palavras são chamadas de cognatos.
Identifique também números e nomes próprios, eles ajudam na compreensão do texto.
1) Underline the cognate words in the text above.
(Sublinhe as palavras cognatas no texto acima)
2) Associe as palavras aos respectivos significados:
a. poverty n. (line 1) ( ) ativo, bens, posses;
b. rights n. (line 1) ( ) caridades, beneficência;
c. goals n. (line 2) ( ) direitos;
d. entitlements n. (line 2) ( ) direitos adquiridos, benefícios;
e. denied v. (line 4) ( ) fardo, carga, peso;
f. assets n. (line 5) ( ) lares, domicílios;
g. burden n. (line 5) ( ) melhorar;
h. unpaid labour adj + n. (line 6) ( ) negado, recusado;
(5)
(10)
(15)
i. households n. (line 8) ( ) níveis;
j. charities n. (line 11) ( ) objetivos;
k. improve v. (line 11) ( ) pobreza;
l. levels n. (line 12) ( ) trabalho não-remunerado.
Vocabulary
Irregular plurals
3) No texto acima, temos alguns substantivos que têm o plural irregular (sem s no final). Complete a tabela ao lado:
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
Activities e Hobbies
4) Match the pictures to the activities listed below:
a. ( ) Cook a meal
b. ( ) Do a martial art
c. ( ) Drink coffee
d. ( ) Drive a car
e. ( ) Eat fast food 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
f. ( ) Go to the cinema
g. ( ) Have a sandwich
h. ( ) Listen to music
i. ( ) Live in an apartment 6. 7. 8. 9.
j. ( ) Meet friends
k. ( ) Play chess
l. ( ) Play the guitar
m. ( ) Read a book 10. 11. 12. 13.
n. ( ) Ride a bike
o. ( ) Sleep
p. ( ) Smoke
q. ( ) Study languages 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
r. ( ) Surf the Internet
s. ( ) Take photos
Singular Plural child
/������/
/��/ men
/����/
people
woman /���/
t. ( ) Take the dog for a walk
u. ( ) Talk on the phone 19. 20. 21. 22.
v. ( ) Travel
w. ( ) Walk
x. ( ) Watch TV
y. ( ) Wear glasses
z. ( ) Work in an bank 23. 24. 25. 26.
5) Use the activities listed above to make four sentences about you (positive and negative).
Ex.:
(+) I drive a car. ( - ) I don’t smoke.
(+) __________________________________
(+) __________________________________
(-) __________________________________
(-) ___________________________________
Grammar
As frases formadas acima descrevem ações no tempo presente, atividades rotineiras ou
verdades incondicionais. Ex.: Brazilian people love soccer! Cats don’t like dogs.
• Para conjugar verbos no Present Simple, utilizamos os pronomes + verbos e verbos auxiliares
somente para frases negativas e interrogativas (do / does / don’t / doesn’t).
• Usamos os auxiliares does e doesn’t na 3ª. pessoa do singular: he, she e it.
Veja abaixo a conjugação do verbo to work (trabalhar) nas formas afirmativa e negativa:
• Repare que na terceira pessoa do singular, forma afirmativa, acrescentamos S ao verbo.
• Na forma negativa, acrescentamos ES ao auxiliar (doesn’t) e o verbo fica na forma infinitiva.
Affirmative Negative
I work in the office. I don’t work in the office.
You work in the office. You don’t work in the office.
He works in the office. He doesn’t work in the office.
She works in the office. She doesn’t work in the office.
It works in the office. It doesn’t work in the office.
We work in the office. We don’t work in the office.
You work in the office. You don’t work in the office.
They work in the office. They don’t work in the office.
Na forma afirmativa, colocamos s na maioria dos verbos, porém temos exceções à regra.
Observe:
• Acrescentamos ES a verbos terminados em SH, SS, CH, X, Z e O. Ex.: He watches TV.
• Tiramos o Y e acrescentamos IES a verbos terminados em Y, precedidos por consoante. Ex.:
She studies Spanish.
• O verbo TO HAVE na 3ª pessoa do singular é irregular, usamos a palavra HAS. Ex.: He has
a new job.
1) Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs (use os verbos que estão entre
parênteses em cada frase):
a. I ___________________ (meet) my friends on
the weekend.
b. She ___________________ (study) every day.
c. Our teacher ___________________ (like)
music.
d. He ___________________ (read) comics.
e. Chris ___________________ (sing) in a band.
f. My brothers ___________________ (play)
basketball professionally.
g. We ___________________ (watch) TV on
Sundays.
h. Andy and John ___________________ (like)
beer.
i. They ___________________ (help) their
parents.
j. The children ___________________ (speak)
English.
k. I ___________________ (live) in a small
town.
l. She ___________________ (speak) four
languages.
m. Jane is a teacher. She ___________________
(teach) French.
n. The food in Japan is expensive. It
___________________ (cost) a lot to live
there.
o. His job is great because he
___________________ (meet) a lot of people.
p. We both ___________________ (listen) to
the radio in the morning.
q. The shops in England ___________________
(open) at 9:00 in the morning.
r. Jackie ___________________ (have) two
children now.
s. Mr. Smith ___________________ (smoke) too
much. He always has a cigarette.
t. When the phone ___________________
(ring), please answer it.
2) Use does and doesn’t to make the sentences below negative.
a. My workmates ___________________ travel much.
b. Mr. Hill ___________________ live in New York. He lives in Boston.
c. We are new here. We ___________________ know him.
d. Dave speaks English, French, and German, but he ___________________ speak Italian.
e. They ___________________ sell that brand anymore.
f. I have a television, but I ___________________ watch it often.
g. We live close to the sea, but we ___________________ go often.
h. You ___________________ ride your bike every weekend.
i. They___________________ eat meat. They are vegetarian.
j. She ___________________ work abroad. She works in Brazil.
k. I ___________________ have any brothers or sisters.
l. Companies ___________________ like disorganized people.
Para fazer perguntas em inglês, sempre vamos precisar de verbos auxiliares. Na aula de hoje,
sobre o Present Simple, vamos ver como se usam DO e DOES para perguntas.
• Podem também ser feitas perguntas com a negativa (DOESN’T / DON’T), mas com a função
de conferir uma informação. Ex.: Don’t you study English?
• Sempre que uma pergunta começar com um auxiliar (am / is / are / do / does), teremos uma
short answer, com o mesmo auxiliar. Ex.: Do you like the Beatles? Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.
• Lembre-se da ordem para perguntas ASI (Auxiliar + Sujeito + Infinitivo). Ex.: Does he
drive? E da ordem QUASI (Question word [what, where, who, how, etc.] + Auxiliar +
Sujeito + Infinitivo). Ex.: Where do you work? Esse tipo de pergunta exige respostas
específicas. Ex.: I work in a hotel.
1. Questions without question words in the Simple Present
Auxiliary Subject Verb Complement Yes/No Subject Auxiliary (+ n't)
Yes, I do. Do you read the news?
No, I don't.
Yes, he does. Does Peter live in a house?
No, he doesn't.
2. Questions with question words in the Simple Present
Question word Auxiliary Subject Verb Complement Answer
What do you do in your free time? I play games on my computer.
Where does your mother go shopping? She goes to the department store.
Who do you live with? I live with my parents and a sister.
Let’s do some exercises!
1) Answer the questions about yourself:
a. Do you drive to work?
_________________________________
b. Do you have a big family?
_________________________________
c. Do you watch TV on Sundays?
_________________________________
d. Do you practice sports?
_________________________________
e. Do you use a computer at work?
_________________________________
f. Do you like your job?
_________________________________
2) Fill in the blanks to make questions.
a) ______________you______________mineral water? (to drink)
b) ______________your teacher______________your homework? (to check)
c) ______________they______________in the old house? (to live)
d) ______________your parents______________TV in the afternoon? (to watch)
e) ______________your grandmother______________the phone? (to answer)
3) Arrange the words below and form questions.
a. she / to collect / stickers -________________________________________________
b. they / to play / a game -_________________________________________________
c. you / to be / from Paris -________________________________________________
d. the pupils / to wear / school uniforms -_____________________________________
e. you / to go / to the cinema -______________________________________________
f. she / to have / friends -__________________________________________________
g. he / to read / books -____________________________________________________
Pronunciation
Vowel Sounds
/�/ = bed, men
/�/ = bad, man
/�:/ = do, you
/�/ = clock, job
• Não há regras para a pronúncia dos sons em inglês. Assim, nem sempre que houver duas
letras em sequência, mas em palavras diferentes, o som será o mesmo.
1) Circle the different word according to the vowel sound:
a. have help negative teacher
b. are bank thanks sandwich
c. food school sports two
d. cost hobby old shopping
Verifique sempre a pronúncia de novas palavras no dicionário! Use um dos sites abaixo
para verificar a pronúncia dessas palavras:
• http://say.expressivo.com/
ou
• http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074
Speaking
1) Complete the questions according to the answers:
a. Where ____________________________________________ ?
I live in Belo Horizonte. The capital city of Minas Gerais.
b. Who __________________________________________ with?
I live with my wife and my three children.
c. Do _______________________________________ apartment?
No, I don’t. I live in a house.
d. What ______________________________________ free time?
We watch TV, we go to the cinema or listen to music.
e. Does _________________________________________ cook?
Yes, she does. She cooks every day.
f. Do ______________________________________ the Internet?
Yes, they do. They love it!
Reading Comprehension
1) Read the text in the beginning of the lesson and answer the questions about it:
a. Do women and men have equal rights?
_______________________________________________________________________
b. Do women represent the majority of unpaid labour?
_______________________________________________________________________
c. Who are the groups who study poverty?
_______________________________________________________________________
d. What situations of women and children have to be improved?
_______________________________________________________________________
Summary (Resumo)
Vimos nesta aula como falar sobre atividades rotineiras e hobbies, bem como sobre atividades de
lazer. Também aprendemos os plurais irregulares de certas palavras do inglês. Além de tudo isso,
você viu um dos tempos verbais mais importantes e utilizados em inglês: o Simple Present. Se você
ainda tiver dificuldades, estude mais sob a orientação do seu tutor e nunca deixe de fazer os
exercícios propostos. Nossas aulas sempre lhe fornecerão a base, o suporte para tudo que você ainda
irá aprender. Bons estudos e até nosso próximo encontro!
See you next class!
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074. Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Library Index. Women and Children in Poverty - Global Conventions On The Rights Of Women
And Children, Progress Toward International Goals, The Feminization Of Poverty. Online.
Disponível em: http://www.libraryindex.com/pages/2692/Women-Children-in-Poverty.html. Acesso
em: 19 set. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em: 23 out.
2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 6th Lesson
Work!
Introduction
Hello! How are things?
Já falamos sobre o que você faz no seu tempo livre e sobre atividades de lazer. Na aula de
hoje, vamos estudar várias profissões, bem como as pessoas que integram as nossas famílias, ou seja,
nossos parentes.
Enjoy it!
Aim
Aprender a usar os artigos definidos e indefinidos associados a profissões.
Compreender como se usa o possessive –s quando referido a pessoas da família e relações de parentesco.
Do you like your job?
How do you relax after work?
How many hours do you work?
What do you do?
What don’t you like about your job?
Where do you work?
Speaking
1) The following sentences are answers to four questions. Use the Present Simple to write
these questions.
__________________________________________________ I’m a teacher.
__________________________________________________ I work in a school.
__________________________________________________ I work … hours a day.
. _____________________________ Yes, I do. I like it a lot
Reading
2) Look at the photo of this woman.
What’s her job? Can you guess?
Ms. Rachel Lee, a ____________________
1) Read the interview and complete it
using the questions in the box below:
1. What do you do?
R: I am a human resources manager.
2. ______________________________________________________________
R: I work in a big company and I select people to work for my company.
3. ______________________________________________________________
R: Yes, I do. I like it a lot! My job is very interesting and I meet many people all day.
4. ______________________________________________________________
R: I have regular work hours. 8 hours a day, from 9 a.m. to 5 p.m.
5. ______________________________________________________________
R: Humm. I don’t like it because sometimes it is a bit stressful. It’s a big responsibility to hire
people.
6. ______________________________________________________________
R: I listen to music in the car on my way home or I go to a bar to meet my friends or I go to the
cinema to relax.
3) Complete the label under Rachel’s photo with her job.
Vocabulary
1) Do you know the name of these jobs in English? Match them.
a. b. c. d. e.
( ) architect ( ) detective ( ) footballer ( ) journalist ( ) pilot
2) Label the pictures.
1. Accountant
2. Builder
3. Businessman
4. Cashier
5. Chef
6. Dentist
7. Doctor
8. Driver (bus / taxi)
9. Electrician
10. Engineer
11. Factory worker
12. Farmer
13. Flight attendant
14. Judge
15. Lawyer
16. Maid
17. Mechanic
18. Musician
19. News presenter
20. Nurse
21. Painter
22. Photographer
23. Police officer
24. Politician
25. Receptionist
26. Salesperson
27. Tailor
28. Travel agent
29. Vet
30. Waiter
1. ______________ 2. ______________ 3. ______________ 4. ______________ 5. ______________
6. ______________ 7. ______________ 8. ______________ 9. ______________ 10. ______________
11. _____________ 12. ______________ 13. ______________ 14. ______________ 15. ______________
16. _____________ 17. ______________ 18. ______________ 19. ______________ 20. ______________
21. _____________ 22. ______________ 23. ______________ 24. ______________ 25. ______________
26. _____________ 27. ______________ 28. ______________ 29. ______________ 30. ______________
Grammar
What do you do?
I’m a doctor. I’m in the office / taxi.
I’m an electrician. I work for a mining company. I’m at work / school / home.
I’m unemployed. I work in a factory. I’m on the bus.
I’m retired. I’m at university.
• Sempre utilizamos os artigos para falar de nossas profissões. Ex.: I’m a teacher. He’s an
engineer. Lembre-se: an é usado antes de palavras iniciadas por vogais; e a antes de palavras
iniciadas por consoantes (sempre no singular). Para profissões no plural, dizemos: They’re
dentists. Portanto, não se usa artigo indefinido antes de palavras no plural, certo? Assim: She
is a doctor; They’re doctors.
Pronunciation
1) Observe the vowel sounds below:
/�:/
car
bar
__________
/� /
hours
about
__________
/�/
company
bus
__________
/�/
work
university
__________
2) Add the jobs to the columns above according to the vowel sounds.
Accountant Clerk Farmer Judge
Where’s the stress? Find and underline the stressed syllable of the words below. Check with
a dictionary if necessary.
Accountant
Architect
Detective
Economist
Employee
Engineer
Interesting
Journalist
Manager
Mechanic
Photographer
Politician
Programmer
Receptionist
Responsibility
Secretary
Spokesperson
University
� Use o website http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074 ou o http://say.expressivo.com/
para conferir a pronúncia das palavras dos exercícios acima.
Speaking & Writing
1) Underline the expression that is correct about your job.
I work …
a. inside
b. outside
c. in an office
d. at home
e. in a factory
f. in a hospital
g. in a company
I work in the … I work with …
a. morning a. my hands
b. afternoon b. a computer
c. evening c. other people
I …
a. have special qualifications
b. speak languages
c. get a lot of money
d. drive
e. write letters or e-mails
f. wear a uniform
2) Now it’s your turn talk about your job! Write seven sentences about it!
• _____________________________________________________________
• _____________________________________________________________
• _____________________________________________________________
• _____________________________________________________________
• _____________________________________________________________
• _____________________________________________________________
• _____________________________________________________________
3) What’s your mother’s job? Is she a housewife? And what’s your father’s job? Write a
sentence to answer these questions.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Vocabulary
• That is my parents’ house.
• It’s Sally’s family.
• She’s Bill Clinton’s daughter.
1) Match the pictures to the sentences above.
2) What’s the relationship between Bill e Chelsea Clinton?
________________________________________________________________________
3) Observe the family tree below:
Fonte: Website englishexercises.org 2010
4) Look at the family tree and complete the sentences about the Simpsons family with
words from the box.
Grandmother Grandfather Grandmother Grandfather
Uncle Aunt
Brother Me Sister Cousin
aunt - brother - daughters father grandparents - husband - mother - nephew niece - parents - sisters - son - uncle - wife
[m1] Comentário: Colocar a
fonte.
a. Homer and Marge Simpson are _____________ and _____________, respectively. They are
Bart, Lisa and Maggie’s _____________, or _____________ and _____________.
b. Bart is Homer and Marge’s _____________. Lisa and Maggie are their _____________.
c. Bart is Lisa and Maggie’s _____________. Lisa and Maggie are Bart’s _____________
d. Ling is Patty’s _____________. Bart is Selma’s _____________.
e. Herb is Bart’s _____________. Patty is Maggie’s _____________.
f. Abraham, Mona, Clancy and Jackie are the children’s _____________.
• Em inglês, sogro, sogra, cunhado e cunhada, são, respectivamente: father-in-law, mother-in-
law, brother-in-law e sister-in-law.
5) Who are they? Look at the Simpsons family tree and write the answers. Remember to
use ‘s.
a. Mona = She’s _______________________
b. Clancy = He’s _______________________
c. Herb = He’s _________________________
d. Selma = She’s _______________________
6) Now, draw your family tree in your notebook. Include the names of people and their
jobs.
Grammar
Por acaso você já viu um tal João’s bar? E o dono do bar era um certo senhor João, correto?
Em inglês, o Genetive Case é formado pela adição do apóstrofo (‘) e s ao substantivo, no qual ‘s é
acrescentada ao nome do dono do objeto de posse, ou seja, o João, dono do bar. Para outras posses
podemos dizer, por exemplo: Mary’s car. Peter’s dog. E lemos da direita para a esquerda: Carro de
Mary. Cachorro de Peter.
• Para palavras que terminam em plural com s, exemplo friends’, acrescentamos somente a
apóstrofe e pronunciamos o –s ao falar. Ex.: My friends’ house. Quando o possuidor for um
nome próprio terminado em s, usa-se apóstrofo (‘) e pode-se usar o s ou não. Ex: The book of
Cris. -> Cris’ book ou Cris’s book.
• Quando houver dois ou mais possuidores e apenas uma coisa a ser possuída, usa-se apóstrofo
(‘) apenas no último dos possuidores. Ex: The book of John and Mary. -> John and Mary’s
book. Se houver dois possuidores e mais de uma coisa a ser possuída, usa-se apóstrofo nos
dois possuidores. Ex: The books of John and Mary-> John’s and Mary’s books.
• Usamos esta forma possessiva apenas para pessoas e animais. Ex: The Book of John ->
John’s book. Não utilizamos ‘s como posse para coisas. Ex.: the end of the film, não the film’s
end. Quando o possuidor não for nem uma pessoa, nem um animal, não se usa ‘s, usa-se of.
Ex: The top of mountain. Ou pode-se colocar o possuidor antes do possuído. Ex: The
mountain top.
• Usamos também a apóstrofe para falar de nossos relatives (parentes em português) e de
nossos parents (falso cognato que parece significar parente, mas significa “pais”). Ex. My
mother’s sister is my aunt.
• Preste bastante atenção nas frases que possuem ‘s, pois esse símbolo pode significar posse
(Ben's computer) ou o verbo to Be na 3ª pessoa (Ben's British=Ben é britânico).
1) Can you see what is the use of ‘s in the text below? Write V for verb to be and G for
genitive case.
This is a photo of Anna, her husband and her children. Her husband's name is Frank. He's an
engineer. Her daughter's name is Sarah. She's 19 and she's a student. Sarah's boyfriend is an
accountant. His name is Jeremy.
2) Write apostrophe 's into the gaps.
Example: I met _______ sister yesterday. (Mandy)
Answer: I met Mandy's sister yesterday.
a) This is ___________________ book. (Gabriel)
b) Let's go to the___________________. (Johnsons)
c) The___________________ room is here. (children)
d) ___________________ sister is twenty years old. (John)
e) ___________________ and___________________ bags have green stickers. (Susan - Steve)
f) ___________________ shoes are on the first floor. (men)
g) My___________________ car is not expensive. (parents)
h) ___________________ CD player is new. (Louis)
i) This is the___________________ bike. (girl)
j) These are the___________________ pencils. (teachers)
Summary
Hoje foi dia de falar sobre trabalho e família, assuntos importantes até mesmo para uma
entrevista de emprego. Esse novo vocabulário acrescido da matéria sobre o Genitive Case pode
ajudar você a se comunicar em diversas situações. Lembre-se sempre: só o aprendizado das aulas não
é suficiente para que você aprenda e fale inglês efetivamente. Pratique, esteja em contato com esse
idioma para que a atividade de escutar se torne uma constante. Primeiro a gente ouve, depois
aprende e por último produz. Vá ao cinema no fim de semana, assista a um filme ou preste atenção a
uma música para treinar seus ouvidos. Esse é seu homework de hoje!
Have fun!!!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074. Acesso em: 15 ago, 2010.
English Exercises. The Simpsons Family Tree. Online. Disponível em: http://www.englishexercises.org/makeagame/my_documents/my_pictures/2008/sep/DBZ_Simpsons_Family_Tree_by_Marruche_web.jpg. Acesso em: 15 ago, 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em: 23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 7th Lesson
Routine, routine!
Introduction
Hello, dear student! Is everything ok?
Em mais uma etapa em prol do seu desenvolvimento em inglês, vamos aprender a qualificar
pessoas e objetos e a falar as horas. Vamos abordar também pronúncia e vocabulário aprendendo
novas expressões, além do Present Simple Tense para atividades rotineiras.
Let’s talk about your routine!
Speaking
1) Read the conversations and underline seven adjectives in the sentences below. (Lembre-
se de que os adjetivos são as palavras que qualificam pessoas, coisas etc.)
A. John: - What do you think of Steve Jobs?
Bob: - I think he’s a great businessman but he’s a strange person.
John: - Yes, I agree, but I like him anyway. He’s very talented.
B. John: - What do you think of Madonna?
Mary: - I think she’s terrible!
John: - I think she’s quite pretty and a very good singer.
C. John: - What do you think of Mick Jagger?
Louis: - He’s not so young and he gets dressed like a teenager, sometimes.
2) Now, find the opposite of the adjectives of the previous exercise in the box below:
Aim
Aprender a falar sobre atividades cotidianas.
Compreender as horas em inglês. Usar adjetivos nas frases, verificando a pronúncia dos sons das vogais, além de novas expressões.
Vocabulary
1) Match the colors and shapes below, like the exemplo.
black blue brown green gray orange pink red yellow
losangle square circle triangle rectangle
2) See the list of opposites below and make 10 expressions using adjectives + nouns:
Big Small
Cheap U$ 45.00
Expensive
U$1.000.00
Safe Dangerous
Dirty Clean
Dry Wet
Easy Difficult
Empty Full
Fast Slow
Fat Thin
amazing - awful - bad - normal
old - ugly - untalented
High
Low
Light
Dark
Long Short
New
Old
Rich
Poor
Tall & Short
1. ____________________________
2. ____________________________
3. ____________________________
4. ____________________________
5. ____________________________
6. ____________________________
7. ____________________________
8. ____________________________
9. ____________________________
10. ____________________________
Grammar
Os adjetivos têm a função de dar qualidade aos nomes – em inglês nouns – ou seja, os
substantivos. Diferente do português é importante observar que:
• os adjetivos em inglês não têm plural. Ex.: new companies / black computers;
• os adjetivos em inglês também diferem do português por anteceder o substantivo. Veja os
exemplos acima em português: novas empresas / computadores pretos, ou seja, a ordem é
inversa. Observe, portanto, que, em português, os adjetivos podem vir tanto antes quanto
depois dos nomes. Em inglês vêm sempre antes deles.
1) Check the expressions from the previous exercise.
2) Now, make comments about the pictures using very (muito), quite (bastante) and not very
(não muito). Use the adjectives in the box.
fair cheap beautiful punctual expensive busy unfair ugly
a b c d
It costs $1.200,00. He’s always late. This is ugly Betty. It’s big but a poor continent.
a)___________________________________________________________________________
b) __________________________________________________________________________
c) __________________________________________________________________________
d) __________________________________________________________________________
Vocabulary
ROUTINE
1) Observe the pictures.
a) b) c) d) e)
f) g) h) i) j)
2) Now, match the pictures to the routines below .
( ) have dinner
( ) have breakfast
( ) have lunch
( ) take a shower
( ) wake up
( ) go to work
( ) go to bed
( ) go to the gym
( ) come back home
( ) watch TV
3) Complete Sally’s routine with the expressions above .
On weekdays, I ______________________ at about six o’clock. First, I
__________________ - a cup of coffee, a banana, cornflakes, and toast. At
about seven o’clock I _________________ by bus. I work in a music store
in Brooklyn. I love it! The store opens at eight. I work all morning and then I
_____________________ at midday – a sandwich in a café. The store closes at five o’clock, and I
____________________. In the evening I __________________ to make some exercises. I really
worry about my health! When I get home, at nine, I __________________and get in my pijamas and
________________with my family. We love watching soap operas. At eleven o’clock I
__________________ and I have sweet dreams.
Grammar
1) Read the sentences about the text.
Sally wakes up at six in the morning. She works in a music store and the store closes at five. She
watches TV with her family at night.
Você notou que, quando a Sally relatava sua rotina, os verbos eram diferentes?
I wake up at six.
She wakes up at six.
Pois é, um dos usos mais comuns do Simple Present é para falar de atos e atividades
rotineiras ou que se repetem em um determinado espaço de tempo. Observe os quadros abaixo:
I
You He
We She
They
wake up
It
wakes up
To make the negative, we use do or does + not.
I
You He
We She
They
don’t (do not) wake up
It
doesn’t (does not) wake up
To make the interrogative, we also use do or does.
I
you he
we she
Do
They
wake up at 6?
Does
it
wake up at 7?
2) Complete the questions and answers.
a) Do you go to the gym? Yes, I do. No, I don’t.
b) Does she wake up late? Yes, she does. No, he doesn’t.
c) Do you go to work by bus? Yes,_________. No, _________.
d) _______ your mother watch TV? Yes,_________. No, _________.
e) _______ you worry about your health? Yes,_________. No, _________.
f) _______ she love her job? Yes,________. No, _________.
3) Underline the affirmative or negative form to make true sentences.
a) I work/ don’t work ten hours a day.
b) My co-workers go/ don’t go to the gym.
c) My boss travels/ doesn’t travel a lot.
d) I drive/ don’t drive to work.
e) My secretary uses/ doesn’t use the computer a lot.
4) Unscramble the words to make questions and answer them. Follow the example:
Example: you/ speak Spanish? Do you speak Spanish?
_No, I don’t.___________________________________________________________
a) travel/ Denise/ a lot __________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
b) you and Mike/ a lot of/ jobs / have _____________________________
______________________________________________________________________
c) your company/ a website/ have ___________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Vocabulary
TELLING THE TIME
1) Look at the clocks:
Canada (morning) Brazil(morning) London (afternoon)
etc.usf.edu/.../33354/clock-08-00_33354.htm etc.usf.edu/.../33534/clock-11-00_33534.htm etc.usf.edu/.../33054/clock-03-00_33054.htm
Do you know how to answer to the question “what time is it?”
2) So, tell the time in the three clocks above.
Clock 1: It’s_______________________________________________________________
Clock 2: _________________________________________________________________
Clock 3: _________________________________________________________________
Speaking & Pronunciation
1) Try to say the time:
a) 8:15 b)9:30 c) 10:45 d)11:00
ngfl.northumberland.gov.uk/.../piechartstut2.htm
Temos quatro quartos na figura acima. Você concorda que em 8:15 passou-se 1/4 de hora; em 9:30 passou metade da hora; em 10:45 falta um quarto para a próxima hora? Assim, temos:
American pronunciation British pronunciation
8:15- It’s a quarter after eight. 8:15- It’s a quarter past eight.
9:30- It’s nine thirty. 9:30- It’s half past nine.
10:45- It’s a quarter to eleven. 10:45- It’s a quarter to eleven.
11:00- It’s eleven o’clock. 11:00-It’s eleven o’clock.
Observe the other examples:
8:05- It’s five after eight. 8:05- It’s five past eight.
9:20- It’s twenty after nine. 9:20- It’s twenty past nine.
Em inglês, quando se passa da metade da hora, dizemos que faltam x minutos para a próxima hora. Assim, temos na língua falada na América do Norte e na Inglaterra, o seguinte:
8:35- It’s twenty-five to nine. 9:40- It’s twenty to ten
10:50-It’s ten to eleven. 11:55- It’s five to twelve.
Além do A.M. e do P.M. – anti-meridien e post-meridien – temos outras maneiras de dizer 12:00 (twelve o’clock): midday (in the afternoon) e midnight (in the morning).
2) Practice:
A B C D
________________ __________________ __________________ __________________
E F G H
_______________ __________________ __________________ ___________________
Writing
1) Now, that you know how to tell the time, to use adjective and routine verbs, write a
small composition about your own daily routine (include times of the day if possible).
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Summary
Vimos na aula de hoje como dar qualidade aos nomes (substantivos) e falar de nossos hábitos
e atividades diárias, tópicos que podem ser importantes para uma entrevista de emprego ou para
elogiar um colega de trabalho e para comunicar-se efetivamente em inglês em diversos contextos.
Espero que você esteja gostando e aprendendo com as aulas, pois este é o nosso objetivo: fazer com
que você aprenda inglês, de forma que essa língua o ajude a ser bem sucedido em sua carreira. Não
se esqueça de pedir ao seu tutor dicas de atividades; peça também que ele esclareça todas as suas
dúvidas!
Bye bye!
Ana Célia Lima
Viviany Gomes Pontes
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074. Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em: 23
out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 8th Lesson
I have a meeting every Monday morning!
Introduction
Hi!!! How are things?
Hoje vamos utilizar em nossa aula advérbios, preposições e expressões de tempo com a
finalidade de dar mais detalhes sobre os nossos horários ou Schedule. Temos também vocabulário e
pronúncia para que você pratique mais essas novas estruturas.
Let’s start!
Reading & Reading Comprehension
Mary's hobbies and interests
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
Mary has a lot of hobbies and interests. She usually gets up early, so she can run before work. She doesn't
often have time to ski, but she occasionally goes on Saturdays during the winter. Mary often rides a horse at a
stable near her home. She sometimes goes after work, but she usually goes horseback riding on Sundays. She
loves music. She always goes to choir practice on Wednesday evenings and sings in church on Sundays. She
doesn't have much extra money, so she rarely goes to concerts in the city. She seldom watches TV because
she likes doing things outside. She usually goes to the gym if it's raining outside. She isn't often alone because
she has a lot of friends. She occasionally does something alone, but she usually does her activities with one of
her friends. She's a happy woman!
Fonte: About.com Website
1) Answer the questions below about the text “Mary’s hobbies and Interests”.
a. Why does she usually get up early?
She gets up early to run before work.
She gets up early to go to work.
She gets up early to have breakfast.
Aim
Aprender como falar sobre atividades cotidianas e a frequência com que elas acontecem
através do uso de advérbios, preposições e expressões de tempo.
b. How often does she ski?
She often skis.
She occasionally skis in winter.
She rarely skis in winter.
c. Does she ride a horse?
She rides a horse every day.
She often rides a horse.
She never rides a horse.
d. When doe she usually go horseback riding?
She usually goes horseback riding after work.
She usually goes horseback riding on Saturdays.
She usually goes horseback riding on Sundays.
e. What kind of music does she like doing?
Playing the violin
Singing
Playing the piano
f. How often does she go to concerts?
Every Sunday
Rarely
Never
g. How often does she watch TV?
She usually watches TV every night.
She seldom watches TV.
She never watches TV.
h. What does she usually do if it's raining?
She goes outside.
She goes to the gym.
She calls friends.
i. How often is she alone?
She is often alone.
She isn't often alone.
She is usually alone.
j. How often does she do something alone?
She never does something alone.
She occasionally does something alone.
She always does something alone.
Grammar
Always 1) Complete the chart with the words
_________________ in the box below:
_________________
Sometimes
_________________
Hardly Ever / Seldom / Rarely
_________________
As palavras acima são advérbios de frequência. Observe as frases seguintes:
I always come to work on time.
They are seldom home when we call.
He usually eats breakfast at this time.
100%
0%
NEVER
OCCASIONALLY
OFTEN
USUALLY
A função desses advérbios muitas vezes é responder à pergunta “How often...?” (com qual
frequência...?) e eles são utilizados antes dos verbos principais – a única exceção é com o verbo To
Be (veja o segundo exemplo acima). Com os advérbios seldom, rarely, hardly ever e never usamos
sempre verbos na forma afirmativa.
2) Underline all the adverbs of frequency in the text about Mary.
3) Put the adverbs of frequency in the brackets ( ) in the correct places.
a. The weather is bad in November. (always)
b. It rains in California. (never)
c. Peter doesn't get up before seven. (usually)
d. They do not play tennis on Sundays. (always)
e. Mary watches TV. (hardly ever)
f. My sister drives to work with a friend. (usually) She drives alone. (never)
g. Carlos is an excellent student. He goes to class. (always)
4) Unscramble these sentences (Reorganize as frases seguintes).
Example: get always up you 7.00 at. - You always get up at 7.00.
a. sometimes at We restaurant a eat. ______________________________________________
b. happy always Shane is. _____________________________________________________
c. doesn't always She take a taxi. ________________________________________________
d. often listens music Tom to. __________________________________________________
e. is Paul never late. __________________________________________________________
f. Sally to sometimes gym goes the. _____________________________________________
g. Dad cook sometimes dinner. _________________________________________________
h. you do often study English? _________________________________________________
Vocabulary
1) Complete the time expressions below:
sixty seconds = a m__ __ __ __ __ sixty minutes = an h__ __ __
twenty-four hours = a d __ __
seven days = a w__ __ __
four weeks = a m__ __ __ __
twelve months = a y__ __ __
2) Observe the dialogue:
A: Do you always carry a briefcase?
B: (Yes,) I usually do. / No, I usually don’t. / No, I rarely do. /No, I hardly ever do.
• Other frequency adverbs and expressions are:
Every day/week/month/year
Once a day/week/month/year
Twice a day/week/month/year
Three times a day/week/month/year
Four times a day/week/month/year
• These expressions are used at the beginning and end of sentences, not before main verbs.
3) Answer the questions about yourself using the time expressions above:
a. How often do you eat in a restaurant? ____________________________________________ b. How often are you late for work? ________________________________________________ c. How often do you have meetings? _______________________________________________ d. How often do you carry a briefcase? _____________________________________________ e. How often do you travel on business? ____________________________________________ f. How often do you visit your clients? _____________________________________________ g. How often do you work late? ___________________________________________________ h. How often do you work at weekends? ____________________________________________
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
The Date
1) Match the pictures to the words below:
_____ the autumn /
fall
_____ Christmas
_____ Easter
_____ New Year
_____ spring
_____ summer
_____ winter
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
2) Complete the months of the year with vowels. Remember to use CAPITAL LETTERS
in the beginning.
a. J__n__ __ry
b. F__br__ __ry
c. M__rch
d. __pr__l
e. M__y
f. J__n__
g. J__l__
h. __ __g__st
i. S__pt__mb__r
j. __ct__b__r
k. N__v__mb__r
l. D__c__mb__r
3) Ordinal numbers. Complete with words and numbers.
1st = first
2nd = ______________
___ = third
___ = fourth
5th = ______________
6th = ______________
___ = seventh
___ = eighth
___ = ninth
10th = ______________
11th = ______________
___ = twelfth
13th = ______________
14th = ______________
___ = fifteenth
___ = sixteenth
___ = seventeenth
18th = ______________
___ = nineteenth
___ = twentieth
___ = twenty-first
22nd = ______________
23rd = ______________
24th = ______________
___ = twenty-fifth
___ = twenty-sixth
27th = ______________
28th = ______________
___ = twenty-ninth
30th = ______________
31st = ______________
• Most of the ordinal numbers are formed by number + th and they are used to say the dates.
What’s the date today? Today is 24/10 = the twenty-fourth of October OR October the
twenty-fourth. In English it’s also possible to say the month before the day 10/24. (A
maioria dos números ordinais é formada pelo número + th e eles são usados para dizer as
datas. Qual é a data de hoje? Hoje são 24/10 = vinte e quatro de outubro. Observe que em
inglês existem os dois sistemas exemplificados acima. Também é possível dizer o mês antes
do dia. Ex.: 10/24).
Grammar
1) Complete the sentences with the prepositions of time AT, IN and ON.
a. My birthday is _____ May.
b. My brother's birthday is _____ the 5th of November.
c. Let's meet _____ six o'clock.
d. I love to go shopping _____Christmas time.
e. We often get up early ______ the morning.
f. What do you do _____ the afternoon?
g. Do you always dream _____ night?
h. What do you normally do _____ Friday nights?
i. We usually go to the movies _____ the evening.
2) Take a look at the chart below and check your answers.
IN ON AT
the morning Monday two o’ clock
the afternoon Friday afternoon midday, midnight
the evening the twenty-second of April lunchtime, dinnertime
December, January… February the 28th night
the summer, the spring… my birthday the weekend
1888, 1994, 2005… New Years Day Christmas, Easter, New Years
We use:
IN for long periods of time (parts of the day, months, seasons and years): in April - in 1986 - in
the winter - in the 19th century - in the 1970s - in the morning(s) / in the afternoon(s) / in the
evening(s) (but don’t say in the night, say at night.
ON for specific periods of time (days of the week and dates): on March 12th, on the 20th of June,
on Wednesday(s) - on Tuesday morning(s) - on Sunday afternoon(s) - on Saturday night(s) - on
Christmas Day (but at Christmas).
AT for times: at 5 o’clock - at 11.45 - at midnight - at lunchtime. And we also use it with time
expressions like: at night - at Christmas - at the moment - at the same time - at weekends - at the age
of…
3) Time to practice! Choose the correct prepositions to complete the gaps in the sentences.
a. Jane’s flight arrives ______ January 26th ______ 2 o'clock ______ the afternoon.
b. Shops in Brazil are usually open ______ lunchtime.
c. Michael has lunch with his clients this Friday ______ noon.
d. ______ December 31st many people drink champagne. It's tradition to
kiss the one you love ______ midnight.
e. Traditionally, British people drink tea ______ 5:00 PM.
f. In Spain people often have a siesta ______ the afternoon.
g. The hills in Italy are covered with flowers ______ the spring.
h. We meet at the coffee shop ______ 9:30 ______ the morning every Thursday.
i. In the USA, they celebrate the Independence Day ______ July 4th.
j. It snows here every year ______ December. We always go outside and play in the snow ______ Christmas
day.
Pronunciation
Em inglês temos alguns sons bem diferentes do português e vamos abordá-los em nossa aula.
É o som do TH de quando dizemos “thank you”, por exemplo. Esse som tem duas formas de
pronúncia, representados pelos símbolos fonéticos / �/ (unvoiced – sem vibração das cordas vocais)
como na palavra third e /� / que ocorre, por exemplo, em they (voiced – com vibração das cordas
vocais). Todas as vezes em que tivermos essas duas letras juntas em uma palavra, temos a pronúncia
de um dos dois sons citados acima, obrigatoriamente. Esse som é produzido com a língua entre os
dentes.
1) Copie e cole os links em seu navegador, ouça e repita as palavras:
/ �/ Thursday thirteenth birthday th ink thanks
http://say.expressivo.com/eric/Thursday.___ thirteenth.___ birthday.____ think._____ thanks.
/� / th is the other their with mother
http://say.expressivo.com/eric/this. the._____ other._____ their._____ with._____ mother.
2) Now, listen and repeat the sentences below:
a. Thu. 13 - Thursday the thirteenth. (http://say.expressivo.com/eric/Thursday_the_thirteenth)
b. 6/12 - The twelfth of June. (http://say.expressivo.com/eric/The_twelfth_of_June)
c. 10/23 - The twenty-third of October. (http://say.expressivo.com/eric/The_twenty-
third_of_October)
d. 3/15/1999 – The fifteenth of March, nineteen ninety-nine
(http://say.expressivo.com/eric/The_fifteenth_of_March,_nineteen_ninety-nine)
e. 1/20/2008 – The twentieth of January, two thousand and eight
(http://say.expressivo.com/eric/The_twentieth_of_January,_two_thousand_and_eight)
3) Where’s the stress in the months of the year? Underline the stressed syllable.
a. January
b. February
c. March
d. April
e. May
f. June
g. July
h. August
i. September
j. October
k. November
l. December
4) Which 5 months are NOT stressed on
the first syllable?
Speaking
1) Answer the questions and remember to use the time expressions:
When do you usually…?
Study ___________________________________
Work ___________________________________
See all your family ________________________
Listen to the radio _________________________
Do housework ____________________________
Go to the beach ___________________________
Go shopping _____________________________
Go on vacation ___________________________
Watch TV _______________________________
Relax ___________________________________
What time do you normally?
Start work _______________________________
Finish work ______________________________
Get up __________________________________
Have lunch ______________________________
Have dinner ______________________________
Go to work ______________________________
Go to school _____________________________
Go to bed _______________________________
Have breakfast ___________________________
Wake up ________________________________
Writing
1) Write a text about your favorite time of day, day of the week, month, season and public holiday. Use dates and time expressions.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Summary
Hoje, nesta aula, estudamos as expressões de tempo e vocabulário para falarmos de nossas
atividades e da frequência com que elas ocorrem. Também estudamos as preposições de tempo in , at
e on. Todas essas palavras e expressões são relevantes. Você consegue perceber que aos poucos seu
vocabulário está crescendo? Pratique esse novo vocabulário. Anote as palavras novas e as que são
mais úteis em seu campo de trabalho. Tudo isso será de grande auxilio na hora de falar inglês. Bons
estudos e até a próxima!
See you soon!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Beare, Kenneth. About.com Website. Mary’s Hobbies and Interests. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/od/beginnerreadingskills/a/adverbs_of_frequency_reading.htm. Acesso em: 23
out. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 9th Lesson
Yes, I can!
Introduction
Good morning! Good afternoon! Good evening! How are you?
Hoje em nossa aula vamos aprender a usar expressões e verbos para falar de algo muito
importante para você ser bem sucedido: suas habilidades. Além disso, vamos ver também estruturas
usadas para você expressar suas opiniões, preferências e falar do que você gosta e do que não gosta.
Let’s get it started!
Aim
Entender e usar estruturas próprias de falas sobre as suas habilidades bem como sobres suas
preferências e gostos.
Speaking
5) Read the dialogues.
a. - Can you play the piano?
- Yes, a little. How about you?
- No, I can't, but I can play the guitar.
b. - Can you cook?
- Not really. I can make toast and pasta, that's all.
- Everyone can make toast!
- Well, can you cook?
- Yes, I can. I can cook delicious fish and
chicken.
- Wow, that's great.
c. - So what can you do?
- I can draw, and I can paint really well too. I can
also speak English and Korean. How about you?
- I can play chess and I can write computer
programs. I can also speak Spanish.
- Excellent!
6) Practice the dialogues. Copy and paste the dialogues at the website
http://say.expressivo.com. Then, listen and repeat the dialogues.
Vocabulary
1) Label the pictures below with the underlined expressions from the dialogues above.
__________________ __________________ __________________ __________________
__________________ __________________ __________________ __________________
2) Which of these activities CAN you do? ________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Grammar
• Usamos Can e Can’t para falar de coisas que conseguimos fazer ou que temos habilidade
para fazer. Ex.: I can write a text but I can’t type (digitar) it.
• Can é um verbo auxiliar modal do inglês que, além de utilizarmos para falar de habilidades,
usamos também para formar frases negativas e fazer perguntas. Ex.: I can’t drive. Can you
drive? Observe que não dizemos I can to drive, e sim, I can drive.
• Can e Can’t têm também outras funções: a de expressar possibilidade ou de fazer pedidos.
Ex.: I can help you tomorrow. (possibilidade)
Can you open the window, please? Can you tell me the time? (pedido)
• Os verbos modais não mudam de acordo com as pessoas (I, he, we, they...). Veja a
conjugação de can nas formas afirmativa, negativa e interrogativa, abaixo:
Affirmative Negative Interrogative
I can plan a meeting. I can’t plan a meeting. Can I plan a meeting?
You can plan a meeting. You can’t plan a meeting. Can you plan a meeting?
He can plan a meeting. He can’t plan a meeting. Can he plan a meeting?
She can plan a meeting. She can’t plan a meeting. Can she plan a meeting?
It can plan a meeting. It can’t plan a meeting. Can it plan a meeting?
We can plan a meeting. We can’t plan a meeting. Can we plan a meeting?
You can plan a meeting. You can’t plan a meeting. Can you plan a meeting?
They can plan a meeting. They can’t plan a meeting. Can they plan a meeting?
• Now, observe the short answers:
Yes, I can.
Yes, you can.
Yes, he can.
Yes, she can.
Yes, it can.
Yes, we can.
Yes, you can.
Yes, they can.
No, I can’t.
No, you can’t.
No, he can’t.
No, she can’t.
No, it can’t.
No, we can’t.
No, you can’t.
No, they can’t.
1) Make 4 negative sentences with the verb can according to the pictures below using the
expressions in the box:
1. 2. 3. 4.
1. You ____________________________________________
2. You ____________________________________________
3. You ____________________________________________
4. You ____________________________________________
2) Choose the correct word to complete the sentences.
a. She can’t _______________ Italian. ( ) speak ( ) to speak
b. _______________ he play chess? ( ) Do ( ) Can
c. Can you help me? Sorry, I _______________ . ( ) don’t ( ) can’t
d. _______________ I see the doctor tomorrow? ( ) Can ( ) Does
e. Can she swim? Yes, she _______________ . ( ) can’t ( ) can
f. I_______________ go out tonight. I'm busy. ( ) can’t ( ) can
g. Can you_______________ to the cinema tonight? ( ) to go ( ) go
h. You_______________ park here. It's no parking. ( ) can’t ( ) don’t
i. I_______________ play football, but not basketball. ( ) can ( ) don’t
j. _______________ I park my car here? ( ) Can ( ) Do
k. Where? I_______________ see him. ( ) doesn’t ( ) can’t
l. _______________ you help me with my homework? ( ) Can ( ) Does
m. Jim makes great food. He_______________cook really well.
( ) can ( ) can’t
PARK IN THIS STREET.
SMOKE HERE.
TAKE PHOTOS IN A MUSEUM.
USE CELL PHONES IN THE CINEMA.
Pronunciation
“CAN e CAN'T: A DIFERENÇA ESTÁ NO RITMO DA FRASE
É notória e persistente a dificuldade que estudantes brasileiros de ESL têm em distinguir as formas afirmativa
e negativa do verbo CAN. O segredo é que a diferença está mais no ritmo da frase do que na pronúncia do / t /.
Da mesma forma que nas frases afirmativas e negativas com o verbo TO BE, o verbo CAN quase desaparece
quando pronunciado numa frase afirmativa, tornando-se um simples apêndice atônico do verbo (ao contrário
do que ocorre em português com o verbo poder ou conseguir). Na sua forma negativa, o CAN'T sobressai em
relação ao resto da frase”. Exemplo:
Escute aqui a frase acima.
Fonte: English Made in Brazil (Online).
Como vimos acima, só colocamos stress no verbo can em perguntas começadas com “can” e
em respostas curtas afirmativas, ao passo que can’t é sempre pronunciado com stress.
Vocabulary
Verb phrases
Verb phrases ou expressões verbais são expressões nas quais temos verbos + substantivos,
adjetivos ou preposições com significados específicos de acordo com um determinado contexto.
Vamos aprender algumas delas?
Buy (a newspaper / a ticket)
Call / phone (a company)
Dance (ballet / the tango)
Find (some money)
Give (someone a discount)
Hear (a noise)
Help (someone)
Look for (your car keys)
Meet (a friend / a client)
Ride (a bike / a horse)
See (a film)
Sing (a song)
Swim (everyday)
Take (your umbrella)
Talk (to someone)
Tell (a secret)
Travel (by bus / by plane)
Turn on / off (the computer)
Wait for (a taxi / someone) Walk (home / to work)
1) Find the meaning of the verb phrases above. Use a dictionary or ask your tutor.
Speaking
Conversation
What do you like doing?
- In my free time I like swimming, traveling, going out with my friends, staying home with my
family… What about you?
- I love going to the cinema, listening to music and going shopping, but I don’t like driving in
big cities and I hate waking up early on weekdays.
Grammar
No exemplo acima, temos duas pessoas conversando sobre suas preferências. Como estão
conjugados os verbos após as expressões destacadas? like, love, don’t like e hate?
1) Reescreva-as abaixo:
☺ 1. ___________________________________________________________________________
� 2. ___________________________________________________________________________
☺☺ 3. ___________________________________________________________________________
�� 4. ___________________________________________________________________________
Após os verbos destacados acima, utilizamos o verbo no gerúndio. Assim como dizemos em
português os sufixos ANDO, ENDO, INDO como em estudANDO, comENDO, sorrINDO. Em
inglês, acrescentamos o sufixo ING aos verbos, o que forma studyING, eatING, SmilING. Em alguns
casos devemos fazer modificações nos verbos. É o caso de verbos terminados em –e e de verbos de
uma só sílaba formados por consoante + vogal + consoante. Veja os exemplos abaixo:
Get = getting
Drive = driving
Run = running
Live = living
Swim = swimming Make = making
2) Now, write the ING form of the verbs below:
Buy =
Call =
Cook =
Dance =
Draw =
Find =
Give =
Hear =
Help =
Look for =
Meet =
Paint =
Phone =
Play =
Read =
Ride =
See =
Sing =
Smoke =
Swim =
Take =
Talk =
Tell =
Travel =
Turn on / off =
Wait for =
Walk =
Write =
3) Write about Susan’s likes and dislikes using the expressions in the box below:
a. She likes watching TV. _______________________________________________________ b. __________________________________________________________________________ c. __________________________________________________________________________ d. __________________________________________________________________________ e. __________________________________________________________________________ f. __________________________________________________________________________ g. __________________________________________________________________________ h. __________________________________________________________________________
4) Choose the correct answer. Use the words in the box.
a. I_______________ playing football. It's fantastic.
b. Susan likes_______________ stories.
c. We hate_______________ for clothes.
d. I like dancing, but I_______________ singing.
e. I love_______________ my friends in Italy.
f. Stephen_______________ studying, but he likes reading.
5) Put the words in the correct order to form phrases.
a. Mike doing likes housework. __________________________________________________
b. hates exercise. Carla doing ____________________________________________________
c. like swimming don't winter. I the in _____________________________________________
d. My mum like cooking. doesn't _________________________________________________
e. love weekend. the They going cinema the to at _____________________________________
f. I to work morning. going Monday hate on ________________________________________
Writing
☺ watching TV, reading the newspaper
� going to the market, taking photos
☺☺ going shopping, listening to music
�� cooking, exercising
DON’T LIKE
HATES
LOVE
PHONING
SHOPPING
WRITING
Utilizando as verb phrases que você já aprendeu até o momento, escreva um pequeno parágrafo
sobre as suas preferências no seu tempo livre e sobre o que você gosta ou não de fazer. Use os verbos
like, don’t like, love e hate para expressar seus gostos.
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Summary
Na aula de hoje falamos mais de você, suas habilidades, seus gostos... Tudo isso com o
propósito de desenvolver seu vocabulário com novas palavras e expressões para facilitar a sua
interação com o mundo. Em todas as aulas aprendemos pronúncia para que você fale e seja
compreendido pelo interlocutor. A pronúncia é fator determinante no aprendizado do inglês uma vez
que as alterações mais sutis fazem grande diferença para quem ouve. Caso você tenha dificuldade,
peça ao seu tutor dicas de sites, consulte dicionários e a internet, fontes inesgotáveis de informação.
A pesquisa ajuda na progressão do seu conhecimento.
Thank you very much!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
English made in Brazil. Diferença entre can e can’t. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.sk.com.br/sk-can.html. Acesso em: 01 nov. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 10th Lesson
This briefcase is mine!
Introduction
Hey! How are things?
Hoje vamos falar de mim, de você, deles... Tudo isso utilizando os pronomes em inglês
conhecidos por nós como pronomes oblíquos (object pronouns) e os pronomes possessivos
(possessive pronouns).
Let’s have some fun!
Reading
1) Read the text about Cathy.
About (1) me
Aim
Conhecer, praticando através de exercícios, os pronomes do inglês: object pronouns e
possessive pronouns.
Aprender a pronúncia correta dos sons de algumas vogais.
My name’s Cathy, and that’s (2) me in the picture.
I’m 26, I’m a Scorpio, and I’m single.
I work for a big company. It’s a good job, but I don’t like (3) it. I prefer
being outside.
I have one brother, He’s 23. I love (4) him, but we’re very different. He has a girlfriend. She’s
beautiful, but my parents don’t like (5) her.
We live at home with our parents. We have a sister, but she doesn’t live with (6) us. She’s married
and she has two children. We see (7) them on weekends.
I listen to all kinds of music, but my favorite is jazz. I play the saxophone, but I don’t play (8) it very
well. I’m not very sporty but I like dancing. I have a lot of friends, and I go out with (9) them every
weekend. What about (10) you?
Grammar
Provavelmente você não sabe como as palavras numeradas são chamadas, mas com certeza
você entende a função delas. Elas são chamadas object pronouns e têm a função de substituir
substantivos em frases. Ex.: She meets Alice. She invites her to her house.
Observe que na segunda frase substituímos Alice por her.
• Os object pronouns também são usados após verbos e preposições. Ex.: See you tomorrow.
Listen to me! (após o verbo see e a preposição to).
Compare na tabela abaixo os subject pronouns (ou pronomes do sujeito: I, he, you, they, etc.)
e os object pronouns (ou pronomes oblíquos – do objeto – me, him, you, them, etc.):
Subject pronouns Object pronouns
I me
you you
he him
she her
it it
we us
they them
Os object pronouns são o objeto na frase. Assim, no trecho: “She’s beautiful, but my parents
don’t like (5) her”, Her substitui his girlfriend (objeto do verbo gostar) que foi citado anteriormente.
É errado dizer My parents don’t like she, pois, “My parents” é o sujeito da frase e “his
girlfriend” é o objeto.
Let’s practice!
1) Complete the sentences with the object pronouns.
a) I don’t like the Doors. Do you like _________________?
b) I don’t like Justin Bieber. Do you like ______________?
c) I don´t like to listen to jazz. Do you like _____________?
d) I don’t like Maria Betânia. Do you like ______________?
e) I don’t like Spice Girls. Do you like _______________?
f) I don’t like winter. Do you like ______________?
2) Rewrite the sentences and substitute for object pronouns.
a) Tell Lucy she needs to finish this report today._______________________________
b) My son loves his job. __________________________________________________
c) Peter likes his strict boss. _______________________________________________
d) My driver drives many cars. ___________________________________________
e) Talk to me and to the manager if you need help. _____________________________
Speaking
1) Write 2 names in the squares below:
Famous actors
Famous actresses
TV programmes
Pop groups
2) Make 8 questions and answers about the people, programmes and groups.
What do you think of (Tarcisio Meira)?
He/she/it’s OK / great / terrible.
They’re OK / great / terrible.
I don’t know him / her / it / them.
a) __________________________________________________________________________
b) __________________________________________________________________________
c) __________________________________________________________________________
d) __________________________________________________________________________
e) __________________________________________________________________________
f) __________________________________________________________________________
g) __________________________________________________________________________
h) __________________________________________________________________________
Grammar
1) Read the sentences below.
• That’s my car. That car is mine.
Qual a diferença entre as palavras sublinhadas nas frases acima? Veja ainda essas outras
frases:
Tell Lucy that car is my car.
I have my bag and she has her bag.
We need a ticket and he needs his ticket too.
She has her money and we have our money.
My brothers’ names are the same as their mother’s name.
like him
don't like her
love it
I
hate them
Você notou a repetição dos substantivos nas frases acima? Será que existe uma maneira de
dizer o que se pretende sem essa repetição? A resposta é SIM! Veja a solução:
Tell Lucy that car is mine.
I have my bag and she has hers.
We need a ticket and he needs his.
She has her money and we have ours.
My mother’s name is the same as theirs.
Viu só? Esses termos grifados são chamados Possessive Pronouns. Eles substituem os
substantivos que, geralmente, já foram mencionados anteriormente. As expressões com os possessive
pronouns sempre substituem uma expressão com um possessive adjective + noun. Ex.: It’s her car.
It’s hers (her car = hers).
Possessive Pronouns Possessive adjectives
mine my
yours your
his his
hers her
its* its
ours our
theirs their
* Apesar de existir, o pronome ITS raramente é usado.
• A diferença é que os possessive adjectives qualificam substantivos (ex.: my house, your
office, etc.), enquanto os pronomes substituem essas expressões. Ex.: A - Whose book is it? Is
it yours (your book)? B - Yes, it is.
• O possessive pronoun nunca é usado antes de um substantivo, pois sua função é substituí-lo.
Outra forma de indicar posse pode ser feita pela construção one of + possessive pronoun.
Eg: A friend of yours (one of your friends) is here.
Vamos praticar!
1) Finish the sentences with a possessive pronoun.
a) It’s your money. It’s ______________
b) It’s our car. It’s _________________
c) They’re your books. They’re ______________
d) It’s his laptop. It’s ________________
e) It’s their documents. It’s _________________
f) It’s her briefcase. It’s ____________________
g) They’re our mobiles. They’re __________________
2) Choose the best answer to fill in the blanks.
a) ( ) Mia left_________ notebook on the bus.
(1) hers (2) her (3) him
b) ( ) My brother has __________ own car.
(1) he (2) him (3) his
c) ( ) This was not my fault. It was ___________.
(1) your (2) her (3) yours
d) She calls you and ________ everyday.
(1) mine (2) him (3) his
e) This is my document. That one is __________.
(1) mine (2) theirs (3) her
Pronunciation
Vowel sounds - /����:/ / / // / /
Book /b k/
Cook /� �/
Good / �/
Yours /!����:�"/
Sporty /������:���:/
Tomorrow
/�’�����:� /
No / /
Home /# �/
Saxophone
/’����� /
Brother /’$����/
Parents /’�����/
Children /’������/
1) Practice the words and repeat them after the website www.say.expressivo.com .
2) Observe the pronunciation of the possessive pronouns below:
3) Rhyming words – Match the possessive pronouns to the words in the second box
according to the rhymes:
Writing
1) Now write a text about like the Cathy’s.
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Summary
MINE
YOURS HIS
HERS ITS
OURS THEIRS
HOURS
WORK MORE
MISS WHERE
FINE THIS
Estudamos os pronomes na aula de hoje, pronomes que conhecemos como oblíquos e
pronomes que indicam posse em inglês. Por serem parecidos com outra estrutura do inglês que já
vimos anteriormente na aula 4, os possessive adjectives, é importante que a diferença entre essas
estruturas tenha ficado clara e, principalmente, que você pratique sempre e de novo tudo que
aprender nas aulas. Pesquise e faça exercícios; peça também a orientação de seu tutor para tirar todas
as suas dúvidas.
Faça bom proveito dessas aulas, pois elas foram pensadas de modo a auxiliar você em seu
processo de aprendizado. Pratique também a pronúncia em inglês!
Don’t forget! Practice makes perfect!
See you soon!
Ana Célia Lima
Viviany Gomes Pontes
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074. Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 11th Lesson
Who was Juscelino Kubitschek?
Introduction
Hello! How are you?
Na aula de hoje vamos falar do que já passou, através de expressões de tempo e de verbos;
vamos aprender e praticar o uso de estruturas para falar do passado em inglês.
Come with me! (Venha comigo)
Speaking
7) Personalities Quiz – Choose a, b or c.
• Who was Juscelino Kubitschek?
a. a politician b. a singer c. a sportsman
• Who was Leonardo DaVinci?
a. a dancer b. a painter c. a singer
• Who was Ayrton Senna?
a. a taxi driver b. a F1 driver c. a pilot of boeings
Aims (Objetivos)
• Praticar o tempo passado dos verbos em inglês
através de frases e vocabulário com expressões
referentes ao passado.
• Entender como funcionam os verbos regulares do
inglês e a pronúncia diferenciada do –ed ao final dos
verbos. regulares.
• Who was Albert Einstein?
a. a musician b. an artist c. a scientist
• Who was Monteiro Lobato?
a. a composer b. a pianist c. a writer
• Who was Santos Dumont?
a. a driver b. an inventor c. a poet
Vocabulary
Word Formation
Muitas palavras em inglês são formadas por derivação, de verbos, substantivos, etc. No
exercício acima, temos várias palavras que designam atividades ou profissões formadas a partir de
substantivos e verbos e às quais são acrescentados os sufixos –er, -or, -ian e -ist.
1) Complete a tabela abaixo com as profissões do quiz do exercício anterior de acordo com a
terminação.
-er -or -ian -ist
Footballer Doctor Technician Psychologist
Grammar
1) Read the sentences below.
• Talking about today
+ He is in a meeting this afternoon.
? Do you like to travel on business?
- She doesn’t have free time during the week.
• Talking about yesterday
Como será que ficam as sentenças acima no tempo passado? Você deve estar se perguntando
o que muda... Para começar, temos em inglês o que chamamos de verbos regulares, e os verbos work,
travel nas frases acima são desse grupo de verbos. Mas o que dizer do verbo is em “He is in a
meeting this afternoon”? Ele também é um verbo regular? O verbo to be tem a sua particularidade
em todos os tempos verbais, portanto no passado também. Vamos ver por partes.
Verb To Be
Present simple Past simple
I am I was
You are You were
He is He was
She is She was
It is It was
We are We were
They are They were
Então, observe a frase do exemplo nas formas presente e passado:
He is in a meeting this afternoon. He was in a meeting yesterday afternoon.
Observe agora as formas negativa e interrogativa do verbo To Be no passado:
Negatives: He wasn’t(was not) in a meeting yesterday afternoon/You weren’t (were not) in a
meeting yesterday afternoon.
Questions: Was he….?/ Were you…?
Short answers: Yes, I/ he/ she/ it was or Yes, you/ we/ they were.
No, I/ he/ she/ it wasn’t or No, you/ we/ they weren’t.
Os demais verbos são classificados em regulares e irregulares. Vamos ver agora a conjugação
do verbo regular “work”:
Present simple Past simple
I work I worked
You work You worked
He works He worked
She works She worked
It works It worked
We work We worked
They work They worked
Viu como é simples? Os verbos não mudam de acordo com os pronomes como acontece no
tempo verbal Simple Present. Observe o exemplo abaixo:
I work a lot every day. I worked a lot yesterday. (qualquer pessoa, singular ou plural, vai
ser sempre a mesma coisa: terminação em ed)
O que dizer das negativas e interrogativas dos verbos de ação? Ora, também é muito simples:
aqui precisamos de um verbo auxiliar que, no tempo passado, é o did para todas as pessoas.
Negative
I didn’t (did not) work a lot yesterday
You didn’t (did not) work …
He didn’t (did not) work …
She didn’t (did not) work …
It didn’t (did not) work …
We didn’t (did not) work …
They didn’t (did not) work
Question
Did I work? Yes, you did/ No, you didn’t.
Did you work? Yes, I did/ No, I didn’t.
Did he work? Yes, he did. No, he didn’t.
Did she work? Yes, she did/No, she didn’t
Did it work? Yes, it did/ No, it didn’t.
Did we work? Yes, we did/ No, we didn’t.
Did they work? Yes, they did/No they didn’t.
Até aqui você deve ter percebido que, para fazer o passado dos verbos regulares, acrescenta-
se –ed. No entanto na negativa e na interrogativa em que usamos o auxiliar did não repetimos essa
terminação, ou seja, o verbo volta para o infinitivo. Fácil, não é?
• É importante lembrar também que só acrescentamos ED aos verbos regulares em frases
afirmativas no passado. Observe:
I worked a lot yesterday.
I didn’t work a lot yesterday.
Did you work a lot yesterday?
Para acrescentarmos ED aos verbos, temos que seguir algumas regras. Preste atenção:
• Em caso de verbos regulares de uma só sílaba, que terminem em consoante + vogal +
consoante, repetimos a última letra e acrescentamos ED. Ex.: stop – stopped;
• já em caso de verbos que terminam em E, acrescentamos apenas a letra D. Ex.: move –
moved;
• para os verbos regulares que terminam em Y, precedidos de consoante, tiramos a letra y e
acrescentamos IED. Ex.: study – studied.
Let’s practice!
2) Here you have a list of regular verbs. Add ED to put them in the past simple.
live answer accept
like ask add
approve arrive attach
cry calculate communicate
disappear dress disagree
end explain play
request intend balance
manage miss need
pretend carry succeed
3) Write 5 positive sentences in the simple past with verbs you learned in this lesson.
a. __________________________________________________________________________
b. __________________________________________________________________________
c. _________________________________________________________________________
d. __________________________________________________________________________
e. __________________________________________________________________________
4) Turn the sentences below in negative and interrogative. Be careful with the verb to Be!
a) He answered the phone call from Miami.
( -) ______________________________________________________________________________
( ?) _____________________________________________________________________________
b) They called their boss to know about the meeting.
( -) ______________________________________________________________________________
( ?) _____________________________________________________________________________
c) We lived in London last year because of Fabio’s job.
( -) ______________________________________________________________________________
( ?) _____________________________________________________________________________
d) John was a successful manager before he retired.
( -) ______________________________________________________________________________
( ?) _____________________________________________________________________________
e) You were my first partner in the company.
( -) ______________________________________________________________________________
( ?) _____________________________________________________________________________
f) Luis wanted to open a new bank account.
( -) ______________________________________________________________________________
( ?) _____________________________________________________________________________
g) Harry was a trainee when he started to work here.
( -) ______________________________________________________________________________
( ?) _____________________________________________________________________________
Vocabulary
Time expressions
I lived in São Paulo when I was 5.
I accepted to work there for four years.
I wanted to travel to China two years ago.
Yesterday evening I waited for your call.
She graduated in 2000.
Other expressions
This morning, the day before yesterday, last week, last month, last Tuesday, last summer, last year...
• We can say yesterday morning, yesterday afternoon and yesterday evening, BUT yesterday
night doesn’t exist. We say last night. (Muito “bacana” essa dica, não é?)
1) Fill in the sentences with a time expression:
a) I was born in Africa ___________ 1970.
b) My boss moved back to Brazil ____________ he got married.
c) He lived in Bristol ____________ three years.
d) I graduated four years ___________.
e) __________ week I got a promotion.
f) We accepted the new partner ___________ evening.
g) I didn't go home___________ weekend because some friends were here.
h) I played tennis every day ___________ I was a teenager.
i) I was at the cinema with my friends ___________ Saturday.
Pronunciation
-ED ending
Há três formas de pronunciar o som do ED /��������/, /����/ or /����/. Observe o quadro abaixo:
Se o verbo terminar em verbo*: examplo pronúncia Sílaba
um desses sons: com -ed: do -ed: extra?
Unvoiced*
(sem voz) /t/ want wanted
Voiced**
(com voz) /d/ end ended
/��������/ sim
/p/ hope hoped
/f/ laugh laughed
/s/ dress dressed
/sh/ wash washed
/tch/ watch watched
unvoiced
/k/ like liked
/����/
play played
allow allowed voiced
Todos os
outros
sons… disappear disappeared
/����/
Não
*significa que suas cordas vocais vibram quando diz o som.
**significa que suas cordas vocais não vibram.
• O som do E na terminação ED só é pronunciado quando o último som do verbo no infinitivo
é /����/ ou /����/. Ex.: decide /��������’����������������/ sendo a pronúncia do passado decided
/��������’������������������������/.
• Note que o som é que é importante, não a letra final. Para ter certeza, consulte sempre a
pronúncia do verbo no infinitivo (utilize o site http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074) e
verifique se o som final é de /����/ ou /����/, isto é, se é voiced ou unvoiced.
1) Clique no link abaixo e assista ao video sobre os voiced e unvoiced sons no passado. Com
essa atividade você saberá o que significa em termos de som cada um desses sinais, ok?
http://my.englishclub.com/video/past-simple-regular-verb-1
Summary
Hoje falamos do que já passou, isto é, de como se faz o passado dos verbos em geral. As
estruturas estudadas hoje podem auxiliar quando você falar de suas atividades anteriores, do que fez
no passado e assim por diante. Espero que você estude através das atividades aqui propostas e não se
esqueça de trazer suas dúvidas para os chats e fóruns. Esclarecê-las só depende de você. Faça sua
parte. Pratique o novo vocabulário com as expressões de tempo e principalmente a pronúncia dos
sons dos verbos no passado. Estarei aqui quando você precisar, bem como seu professor tutor.
Enjoy your study!
Ana Célia Lima
Viviany Gomes Pontes
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074. Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Englishclub.com. Past Simple Regular Verb Endings. Disponível em http://my.englishclub.com/video/past-simple-regular-verb-1. Acesso em: 12 nov. 2010. Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 12th Lesson
Where did you go for your last holiday?
Introduction
HI, dear student! What’s up?
Em nossa aula de hoje, vamos abordar o passado por meio de acontecimentos históricos (ou
não) usando o tempo verbal do inglês que conta com verbos regulares e irregulares.. O seu passado e
o passado do mundo são importantes para o nosso presente. Para isso, vamos contar com uma aula
repleta de gramática, vocabulário e pronúncia!
Enjoy it! Practice it!
Vocabulary
8) Que verbos utilizamos com cada uma dessas expressões? Você se lembra? Alguns já
foram nosso objeto de estudo. Com alguns deles usamos go, have ou get. Coloque cada
um dos verbos na coluna correta. Depois, confira suas respostas em um dicionário.
_______________
a newspaper (=buy)
a taxi / bus / train (=take)
an e-mail / letter (=receive)
dressed
home (=arrive)
Aim
Estudar o Simple Past dos verbos em inglês.
Conhecer mais alguns verbos e acrescentar alguns vowel sounds à nossa lista.
to a restaurant (=arrive)
up
_______________
away (for the weekend)
by bus
for a walk
home (by bus / car)
out (on Friday night)
shopping
to a restaurant
to bed (early / late)
to church / to mosque
to the beach
_______________
breakfast / lunch / dinner
a car
a drink
a good time
a sandwich
a shower
9) Practice the expressions above. Copy and paste the dialogues at the website
http://say.expressivo.com. Then, listen and repeat.
• Você sabe a diferença entre as expressões go home e get home? Escreva aqui:
_________________________________________________________________________________
Speaking
3) Paula and David live in São Paulo and they are talking about David’s night out. Read
the dialogue and practice it.
Paula: Did you go out last night?
David: Yes, I did. What about you? Did you have fun?
Paula: No I didn’t. I had a test this morning so I stayed home to study last night.
David: I went out for a boys night out with my friends.
Paula: Hmmm. Good! Where did you go?
David: We went to a bar and after the bar we went to a friend’s house for a party.
Paula: Wow! It seems like you had a lot of fun!
David: Yes, we did. We talked and drank and it was very nice!
Paula: What did you have to eat and drink?
David: Well, at the beach bar we drank beer and after the party we had some sandwiches.
Paula: And how did you go home?
David: Oh, we took a taxi.
Paula: Very good idea! Did you get home very late?
David: No, I didn’t. I got home at about 1 p.m.
Paula: So, did you have a good time?
David: Yes, I did. It was great! But now I feel a bit tired and I want to go to bed again.
Grammar
1) Quais as 2 palavras que se repetem nas questões sublinhadas acima?
_________________________________________________________________________________
2) Qual a diferença entre as questões abaixo? Escreva as respostas das duas perguntas.
Where did you go? Did you have a good time?
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Como vimos na aula anterior, usamos o Simple Past para falar de atividades ou ações
terminadas. Ainda nesta unidade, vamos revisar o que já aprendemos e acrescentar os verbos
irregulares do inglês. Veja a conjugação do verbo irregular “get” (no sentido de chegar) no passado:
Affirmative Negative Interrogative
I got home late. I didn’t get home late. Did I get home late?
You got home late. You didn’t get home late. Did you get home late?
He got home late. He didn’t get home late. Did he get home late?
She got home late. She didn’t get home late. Did she get home late?
It got home late. It didn’t get home late. Did it get home late?
We got home late. We didn’t get home late. Did we get home late?
You got home late. You didn’t get home late. Did you get home late?
They got home late. They didn’t get home late. Did they get home late?
• Observe agora as short answers:
Yes, I did.
Yes, you did.
Yes, he did.
Yes, she did.
Yes, it did.
Yes, we did.
Yes, you did.
Yes, they did.
No, I didn’t.
No, you didn’t.
No, he didn’t.
No, she didn’t.
No, it didn’t.
No, we didn’t.
No, you didn’t.
No, they didn’t.
Como você pode ver, frases negativas e interrogativas exigem o auxiliar DID(N’T), e, após o
auxiliar, usamos o verbo no infinitivo uma vez que o auxiliar já demonstra que a frase está no tempo
passado, assim como as frases afirmativas demandam o uso dos verbos no passado, sejam eles
regulares ou não.
• Sempre que precisar, consulte a lista de verbos irregulares no final do livro ou um dicionário.
Os verbos que não constam nessa lista, provavelmente são regulares e devem ser acrescidos
de (I)ED de acordo com a terminação.
• Lembre-se sempre da seguinte ordem para perguntas em inglês, tanto no presente quanto no
passado:
ASI = auxiliar + sujeito + infinitivo (verbo)
Did you have a good time?
Did you get home late?
(wh-question)
QUASI = pronome interrogativo + auxiliar + sujeito + infinitivo (verbo)
How did you go home?
What time did you get home?
• O verbo can, que estudamos na aula 9, é um verbo modal utilizado também para formar
perguntas e frases negativas e é conjugado no passado em inglês da seguinte forma:
+ - ?
I could swim when I was 5. I couldn’t swim when I was 5. Could I swim when I was 5?
3) Encontre e circule os verbos abaixo na conversation do início da aula e os reescreva:
Drink = ______________________
Have = ______________________
Take = ______________________
Go = ________________________
4) Complete the sentences below with the simple past of the verbs in the box (consulte a
lista de verbos a que já me referi):
a. She _________________ us all the information we asked for.
b. I _________________ a very good time at the trade fair (feira de negócios).
c. I _________________ very nervous before my exam yesterday.
d. He _________________ to Paris by train.
e. I _________________ about it in the newspaper.
f. A woman came into the shop and _________________ five hats.
5) Teresa went on a business trip. Write questions using the words given (remember to use
QUASI and ASI):
Example: where / the hotel / was = Where was the hotel?_______________
a. Where / she / went = ________________________________________________
b. How long / she / stayed / there = _______________________________________
c. If / the food / was / good = ____________________________________________
d. If / she / went / by plane = ____________________________________________
6) Fill in the blanks with the past form of the verbs in parenthesis.
a. My sister (make) __________________ a birthday cake for me last week.
b. My friends (drive) __________________ to Los Angeles two weeks ago.
c. Elizabeth (take) __________________ some flowers to her mother last Saturday.
d. Last week my aunt (have) __________________ a baby.
e. The child (drink) __________________ some milk last night.
f. My teacher (buy) __________________ some new books last month.
7) Put the verbs into the correct form to complete the text about Simon’s holiday.
Last year I (spend) __________________ my holiday in Ireland. It (be) __________________ great.
I (travel) __________________ around by car with two friends and we (visit) __________________
lots of interesting places. In the evenings we usually (go) to a pub. One night we even (learn)
BE BUY GIVE GO HAVE READ
__________________ some Irish dances. We (be) __________________ very lucky with the
weather. It (not / rain) __________________ a lot. But we (see) __________________ some
beautiful rainbows. Where (spend / you) __________________ your last holiday?
8) Find the regular verb in each line and write it into the gap.
Example: say, lose, dance, sing - dance__
a) read, feel, play, see -________________
b) listen, do, go, make -________________
c) know, help, say, think -________________
d) like, write, forget, eat -________________
e) take, bring, cut, clean -________________
f) watch, be, have, meet -________________
g) put, buy, cook, teach -________________
h) catch, find, answer, lose -______________
i) want, tell, win, sit -________________
j) sell, build, drink, open -________________
Vocabulary
CULTURE QUIZ
1) Circle the correct answer:
1. She served as Prime Minister of the United Kingdom from 1979 to 1990. She was the first
woman in her position in the UK.
Hanna Suchocka Elisabeth Domitien Margaret Thatcher Edith Cresson
2. She was the first African American woman to become The United States Secretary of State. Her
name comes from Italian.
Miriam A. Ferguson Madeleine Albright Patience Sewell Latting Condoleezza Rice
3. Who was the inventor of dynamite?
The Chinese Georg Friedrich
Henning
Alfred Nobel Joseph Wilbrand
4. Who were the three musketeers in Alexandre Dumas's novel by the same name.
Athos, Portos,
d'Artagnan
Portos, d'Artagnan,
Aramis
Athos, Portos, Aramis Aramis, d'Artagnan,
Athos
5. Which war began in 1914?
Spanish-American war Russo-Japanese war World War II World War I
6. What Italian Renaissance artist painted the Sistine Chapel?
Claude Monet Leonardo Da Vinci Vincent Van Gogh Michelangelo
7. This pharmacist invented Coca Cola.
Frank Robinson James Russell Doctor John Pemberton Viktor Schauberger
8. Which company made the first commercial portable cell phone in 1983?
Samsung Nokia Att Motorola
Fonte: Adaptado do site www.123facts.com
Pronunciation
Vowel Sounds – Diphthongs /��������/ /����/ /����/ / /
/��������/ /����/ /����/ / /*
boy year where tourist
* Esse som não é muito comum.
1. Put the words below in the chart according to the vowel sounds. Check the
pronunciation at the website www.say.expressivo.com
airport
beer
coin
enjoy
euro
fair
here
plural
square
sure
toilet
we’re
Writing
1) Utilizando os verbos no passado estudados nesta aula de hoje, gostaria que você
escrevesse um texto contando sobre suas últimas férias. Para isso, você deve estruturar
o seu texto de modo que responda às seguintes perguntas:
- Where did you go? (to the beach, to the countryside,…)
- Who did you go with? (with your friends, family…)
- How did you go? (by car, by bus, by train, by plane…)
- What did you do?
- How long did you stay there? (2 days, a weekend, 3 weeks, a month…)
- Did you have a good time?
What did you do for your last holiday?
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Summary
Que tal a aula de hoje? Muitas descobertas e seu vocabulário crescendo? Hoje falamos de
verbos regulares e irregulares. Sim, os verbos irregulares são muitos e não os aprendemos em um
piscar de olhos. Aprender requer dedicação. Espero que você aproveite esse novo conhecimento não
apenas de modo teórico; anote as novas palavras e expressões que você encontra, pois só depende de
você estudar de modo a desenvolver suas habilidades linguísticas através dos tópicos que são
ensinados durante as aulas.
Basta querer! Bons estudos!
Bye bye!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
123 Facts.com. Trivia Quizzes. Online. Disponível em: http://www.123facts.com/. Acesso em: 01
nov. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 13th Lesson
Shopping for furniture
Introduction
Good morning! Good afternoon! Good evening!
Hoje temos muita coisa nova para estudar! Gramática, vocabulário e pronúncia de novas
palavras relacionadas a casas, móveis e demais objetos de decoração.
Let’s go!
Vocabulary
1. Complete the boxes in the picture below with the names:
DOOR – GARAGE – ROOF – STAIRS – WALL – WINDOW
Aim
Conhecer uma nova estrutura, There to be, no presente e no passado.
Conhecer vocabulário referente a móveis e as preposições indicadoras de lugar.
Treinar os sons das consoantes do inglês.
2. Do you live in a big house? How many rooms does it have? 7? 8? 9? …?
_________________________________________________________________________________
3. Look at the pictures below. Can you label the rooms? Use the words in the box:
1. ____________________________ 2. __________________________ 3. ___________________________
4. ____________________________ 5. __________________________ 6. ___________________________
4. Where are these objects from? Write BA for BATHROOM, BE for BEDROOM, D for
DINING ROOM, K for KITCHEN and L for LIVING ROOM.
BATHROOM – BEDROOM – DINING ROOM – GARAGE – HALL – KITCHEN
1. Armchair ( ) 2. Fireplace ( ) 3. Lamp ( )
4. Desk ( ) 5. Plant ( ) 6. Sofa ( )
7. Shower ( ) 8. Picture ( ) 9. Mirror ( )
10. Bed ( ) 11. Bath ( ) 12. Shelves ( )
13. Sink ( ) 14. Clock ( ) 15. Light ( )
16. Cupboard ( ) 17. Cooker ( ) 18. Floor ( )
19. Toilet ( ) 20. Fridge ( ) 21. Carpet ( )
Grammar
THERE TO BE
O verbo THERE + TO BE corresponde ao nosso haver ou existir e o utilizamos para falar do que
existe em um determinado espaço, por exemplo: There is a sofa in the living room. Para a forma do
verbo no singular, presente, vamos usar there is (affirmative) – ex.: there’s a car in the garage ou
there isn’t (negative ) – ex.: there isn’t a computer in the study room); para fazer perguntas, você já
sabe, invertemos a ordem. Ex.: Is there a television in your kitchen?
Como você pode observar pelo exemplo acima, podemos contrair “there + is” em frases
afirmativas (there’s), porém não podemos contrair a forma there are, usada para o plural. Ex.: There
are two dogs in the garden. There aren’t clouds in the sky today. Are there plants in your house? E
para respostas curtas vamos usar as mesmas estruturas. Observe: Is there a hospital in your street?
Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t. Ou para o plural: Are there many stores near your house? Yes, there
are. / No, there aren’t.
1) Make 5 (+) sentences to describe the picture below using THERE IS / THERE ARE:
a. _______________________
_________________________
b. _______________________
_________________________
c. _______________________
_________________________
d. _______________________
_________________________
e. _______________________
_________________________
2) What isn’t there in your street? Make 4 negative sentences.
Example: There isn’t a bank in my street.
a. _________________________________________________________
b. _________________________________________________________
c. _________________________________________________________
d. _________________________________________________________
3) Answer the questions about yourself. Use: Yes, there is / no, there isn’t / yes, there are /
no, there aren’t.
a. Are there two chairs in your bedroom? __________________________________________
b. Is there a television in your living room? _________________________________________
c. Is there a bus stop in your street? _______________________________________________
d. Are there pets in your house? __________________________________________________
e. Is there a computer in your bedroom? ___________________________________________
f. Are there flowers in your kitchen? ______________________________________________
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
THERE TO BE IN THE PAST
Assim como usamos o verbo There to be para falar de coisas que existem, também o
utilizamos para falar do que já existiu. Para usá-lo no passado, substituímos is e are por was e were,
respectivamente. Fazemos o mesmo para respostas curtas, porém there was e there were servem para
falar do passado, e geralmente são acompanhados de expressões de tempo. Ex.:
( + ) There was a good film on TV yesterday.
( - ) There weren’t many people at the conference last Friday.
( ? ) Were there parking spaces at the shopping mall on Sunday?
Let’s do exercises!
4) Complete the sentences below with the correct form of There to BE in the Past.
Ex.: How many people were there in the office yesterday?
a. _______________ a woman... no, wait: _______________ two women and three men.
b. - _______________ any problems with the new car this morning?
- No, the new car works perfectly.
c. It was really hard to find the way to Rose's house. _______________ any signs on the street
showing which way to go!
d. - So, did you go to New York last week? - No, I tried to book a flight but_______________ any seats left. e. - Can you help me find a copy of this book? - I'm not sure we have it anymore. _____________one on that shelf last week... Hmm, it's been sold. f. ___________________ a new student in your class yesterday?
Pronunciation
Consonant Sounds /����/ /����/ /$$$$/ /����/
Shower
Wall
____________
____________
Clock
K itchen
____________
____________
Bathroom
Bed
____________
____________
Carpet
Plant
____________
____________
1) Find two more words with the consonant sounds above and complete the spaces.
• Assim como em português, algumas letras do inglês são chamadas silent, ou seja, elas não são
pronunciadas. Isso acontece com a palavra hora em português (hour em inglês).
• Sempre consulte um dicionário e verifique a pronúncia das palavras. Dicionário Online:
http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074
Vocabulary
Prepositions of place (Preposições que indicam lugar)
1) Observe as figuras à esquerda e utilize as preposições de lugar para completar as frases
sobre o living room abaixo:
Fonte: EnglishClub.com
Up Down Out of Into
In On Under Over
Next to Across Along
Fonte: Flickr.com
2) Use as preposições acima e faça frases descrevendo a posição de 2 objetos ao seu redor.
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Writing
1) Look at the picture Vincent’s Bedroom at Arles by Vincent Van Gogh and make sentences using THERE + TO BE and prepositions:
a. ___________________________________________________________________________
b. ___________________________________________________________________________
c. ___________________________________________________________________________
d. ___________________________________________________________________________
e. ___________________________________________________________________________
f. ___________________________________________________________________________
g. ___________________________________________________________________________
Summary
Hoje falamos do que existe, e você aprendeu a descrever um ambiente e seus móveis e
demais objetos que o compõem. Além disso, você viu como precisar a localização desses objetos
através das preposições de lugar. Outra coisa nova foram os sons das consoantes, o que vamos
estudar um por um até o final do curso. Isso vai auxiliá-lo no reconhecimento das diferenças de sons
entre a língua inglesa e o português com que você já está acostumado. Como você pode perceber, aos
poucos, com o passar das aulas, seu vocabulário aumenta e você descobre mais coisas novas sobre a
língua inglesa. O que sempre recomendo ao final de nossas aulas é a prática; sem prática não há
aprendizado. Busque aprender e colabore para que isso aconteça de forma efetiva. Estude!
See you soon!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
English Club.com. Prepositions of place. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.englishclub.com/vocabulary/prepositions-of-place.htm. Acesso em: 30 nov. 2010.
Flickr.com . Photos Gabriel HL. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.flickr.com/photos/gabrielhl/2743022850/. Acesso em: 29 nov. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 14th Lesson
Where’s the post office?
Introduction
Hi! It’s time to study!!!
Nesta aula vamos aprender um novo tempo verbal, além de expressões verbais e nomes de
lugares para aumentar o seu vocabulário. Temos ainda a pronúncia de um som muito peculiar do
present continuous.
Let’s start!?
Aim
Aprender a falar do que está acontecendo através do present continuous.
Verificar a diferença entre este e o present simple.
Conhecer novas expressões verbais, nomes de lugares, estabelecimentos comerciais e a
pronúncia do som do –ing.
Reading
1) Read the sentences below:
He works from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.
Excuse me, do you speak English?
What does she do in your company?
Most people learn time is money.
I go to São Paulo once a week.
Compare the sentences above with these new sentences.
He is working overtime this week.
Listen to those people. What language are they speaking?
What are you doing in your day by day?
Maria is learning English in Britain at the moment.
I’m going to an important meeting now.
Grammar
What’s different?
Você deve se lembrar de que os verbos das frases do primeiro grupo estão no Present Simple
e ele é usado para falar sobre coisas de rotina ou que se repetem no tempo (vimos isso na aula 5). Já
o tempo verbal dos verbos que compõem as frases do segundo grupo nós o chamamos de Present
Continuous e ele é usado, geralmente, quando
• a ação ocorre no momento ou perto do momento da fala;
• a ação não é terminada, ou seja, está em progresso;
• se quer referir a um futuro próximo.
Tom and Ann are talking in a café:
TOM: I’m reading an interesting book at the moment.
ANN: Lend me it when you finish reading!
Tom não está lendo o livro no momento da fala. Ele começou a ler o livro, mas ainda não
terminou.
Some more examples:
-Catherine wants to work in Italy, so she is learning Italian (but she isn’t learning exactly at the time
of speaking).
-Some friends of mine are starting their own business. They hope it’s finished before 2011.
• A estrutura do present continuous consiste no uso do verbo to be (am / is / are) + verbos com a
terminação –ing, que significa o gerúndio da língua inglesa. Observe a conjugação do verbo
work:
Affirmative
I am working.
You are working.
He is working.
She is working.
It is working.
We are working.
They are working.
Negative
I’m not working.
You aren’t working.
He isn’t working.
She isn’t working.
It isn’t working.
We aren’t working.
They aren’t working.
Interrogative
Am I working?
Are you working?
Is he working?
Is she working?
Is it working?
Are we working?
Are they working?
Facílimo, não é mesmo?
• Existem regras para acrescentarmos - ing aos verbos. São as seguintes:
- Em caso de verbos terminados na letra –e, tiramos a letra –e e acrescentamos –ing. Ex.: live –
living;
- em caso de verbos de apenas uma sílaba, terminados em consoante + vogal + consoante, dobramos
a última letra e acrescentamos –ing. Ex.: stop – stopped;
- para todos os outros verbos, com outras terminações, acrescenta-se –ing ao verbo. Ex.: walk –
walking.
• Quando usamos o Present Continuous para falar de coisas que estão acontecendo,
frequentemente temos as expressões de tempo hoje (today), esta semana (this week), este mês
(this month), etc.
-You’re working hard today.
- Is Mr. Brown travelling on business this month?
• Usamos o Present Continuous também para falar sobre mudanças:
-The population of the world is rising very fast. (not “rises”)
- Is your English getting better? (not “does your English get better”)
Other uses:
-I always check my e-mails. (confiro sempre, todo dia, etc.)
-I’m always checking my e-mails. (confiro o tempo todo, mais vezes do que é necessário)
-You always watch TV. You love to watch the news.
-You are always watching TV. You should do something more active.
• IMPORTANT: The following verbs are not normally used in continuous verbs.
PRACTICE
1) Are the underlined verbs right or wrong? Correct the verbs that are wrong.
a) The water boils. Can you turn it off? Wrong: is boiling.
b) Water boils at 100 degrees Celsius. _______________________________________
c) Look! That man tries to save the file in his computer. __________________________
d)Can you hear those people? What do they talk about? __________________________
e) The boss travels to Miami every week. _______________________________________
f) I must go home now. It gets late. ____________________________________________
g) I usually drive to work. ___________________________________________________
h)‘Hurry up! It’s time to leave the office.’ ‘Ok, I come. ____________________________
2) Put the verb in the correct form, present simple or present continuous.
a) Julia is very good at languages. She _______________(speak) four languages very well.
b) ___________________ (listen) to the news everyday?
c) The Apple computers _____________________ (get better) day by day.
d) ‘How is your English?’ ‘Not bad. It __________________(improve) slowly.
e) Ron is in London at the moment. He ___________________(stay) at the Park Hotel.
Like love hate want need prefer
Know realize suppose mean understand seem
Believe remember belong contain consist depend
f) My employees ______________ in Bristol. They have shared a house there for a long time.
g) Sonia __________________ (look) for a place to live near her office.
3) Write about something you always do and you are always doing with the verbs below.
a) It’s always raining when I try to play soccer._________________________________
b) ____________________________________________________________________
c)_____________________________________________________________________
d)_____________________________________________________________________
e)_____________________________________________________________________
f)_____________________________________________________________________
g)_____________________________________________________________________
h)_____________________________________________________________________
i)_____________________________________________________________________
j)_____________________________________________________________________
k)_____________________________________________________________________
Vocabulary
PLACES IN TOWN
1) Match the pictures to the nouns.
( ) baker’s
( ) bus stop
( ) butcher’s
( ) church
( ) department store
( ) drugstore 1. 2. 3. 4.
( ) bridge
( ) gas station
( ) museum
( ) parking lot
( ) police station 5. 6. 7. 8.
( ) post office
( ) river
lose spend leave rain do break use think forget start go
( ) sports center
( ) square
( ) train station
( ) travel agent 9. 10. 11. 12.
13. 14. 15. 16.
17.
Reading
English exercise "Present continuous OR Present simple?"
1) Read and complete the text with the appropriate verb tenses:
“My name _______________ (to be) Peter; l _______________ (to live) in the suburbs of Boston
with my family. Most people _______________ (to believe) we _______________ (to be) rich
because we _______________ (to live) in a big house. But our family _______________ (to seem) to
be like any other one. Have a look:
Maggy, my wife, _______________ (to like) cooking. She _______________ (to enjoy) being in the
kitchen with her friends. At the moment she _______________ (to make) a cake and you can't talk to
her.
What really _______________ (to worry) her is our daughter who _______________ (to prefer) to
chat in front of her computer instead of cooking with her. Like many teenagers, Jenny
_______________ (to think) it _______________ (to be) easier to get advice from someone you
_______________ (not + to go to) see later. It's 5 pm. Paul, my son, _______________ (to play)
basketball in the garden and I _______________ (to watch) TV, I _______________ (to wait) for
this delicious cake that Maggy _______________ (to cook) . I told you, a family as yours.” (Peter)
Fonte: www.tolearnenglish.com
Pronunciation
-ING Sound
O som da pronúncia do gerúndio em inglês, formado pela terminação –ing, é muito peculiar,
representado pelo símbolo /%%%%/. Esse símbolo traduz, na maioria das vezes, o som das letras i+n
seguidas das letras k ou g. Esse som é recorrente no present continuous por causa da terminação dos
verbos.
1) Circule as palavras abaixo que não possuem o som /%%%%/. Lembre-se de consultar a
pronúncia em um dicionário! (Sugestão: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074)
Boiling
Daughter
Drugstore
English
Garden
Kitchen
Long
Meeting
Reading
Spend
Think
Working
2) Pratique os verbos no present continuous que você aprendeu nesta aula no site
http://say.expressivo.com/.
Writing
2) Write about the things you are doing these days. Ex.: I am studying English. ___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
3) Complete the answers using the present continuous and the verb phrases given.
a. What is she doing at the travel agent’s? She is ………………………………………………..
(book a ticket).
b. What is he doing at the post office? He is ……………………………………………………...
(send a letter).
c. What are they doing at the drugstore? They are ..........................................................................
(buy some medicine).
d. What is she doing at the bus station? She is ……………………………………………………
(wait for her cousin).
e. What is Mark doing at the department store? He is ……………………………………………
(buy Christmas gifts).
f. What is Lisa doing at the museum? She is …………………………………………………….
(work). She is a tour guide.
g. What are they doing at the gas station? They are ........................................................................
(fill in their car).
h. What are Claire and Susan doing at the square? They are ……………………………………
……………….. (take a walk).
Summary
Na aula de hoje o tema foi o seu presente, o que você tem feito recentemente. Estudamos o
present continuous e você percebeu a diferença entre os dois tempos verbais Present continuous x
Present Simple (que você tem estudado a partir da aula 5). Além disso, vimos um novo vocabulário
que diz respeito a lugares na cidade e estabelecimentos comerciais. Você aprendeu ainda expressões
com verbos no gerúndio e verbos que não são usados no gerúndio, em inglês. Espero que faça bom
proveito da gramática, vocabulário e pronúncia contidos nesta aula.
Remember that practice makes perfect!
Let’s go study?
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
ToLearnEnglish.com. Present Continuous or Present Simple? Online. Disponível em:
http://www.tolearnenglish.com/exercises/exercise-english-2/exercise-english-12052.php. Acesso em:
12 dez. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 15th Lesson
How much coffee and water do you drink a day?
Introduction
Hello! How are you?
Hoje é dia de estudar inglês! Novas estruturas gramaticais, novas palavras e a pronúncia de
novos sons da língua inglesa esperam por você nesta aula.
Enjoy your class!
Speaking & Reading
1) Read the conversations below:
Talking about coffee
Aim
Conhecer novas palavras e um novo vocabulário que inclui comida, bebida e
substantivos contáveis e incontáveis de modo geral.
Conhecer os quantifiers do inglês, palavras muito importantes para falarmos de
quantidade.
Aprimorar a pronúncia de mais alguns sons das consoantes.
A: How much coffee do you drink?
B: About 8 cups a day.
A: That's too much!
B: How many cups of coffee do you drink?
A: No more than 2 cups a day.
B: That's not enough.
Talking about water
A: How much water do you drink?
B: About a glass.
A: That's not enough.
B: How many glasses of water do you drink?
A: At least 8 glasses a day.
B: That's too much.
8 cups of coffee is unhealthy*. 8 glasses of water is healthy**. Coffee is usually recommended by
doctors (2 cups maximum) and water is always recommended by doctors (8-12 glasses is the
recommended standard).
*Unhealthy = it’s not good for you. Não é saudável para você.
**Healthy = it’s good for you. É saudável para você.
Agora, responda à seguinte pergunta:
2) How much water do you drink a day? How many cups of coffee do you drink a day?
_________________________________________________________________________________
Vocabulary
FOOD
1) Write B for Breakfast, S for Snack (lanche), L for Lunch and D for Dinner.
1. Pineapple ( ) 2. Sugar ( ) 3. Sweetening ( ) 4. Lettuce ( )
5. Rice ( ) 6. Bananas ( ) 7. Potatoes ( )
8. Chocolate ( ) 9. Cookies ( ) 10. Cake ( ) 11. Candies ( )
12. Coffee ( ) 13. Meat ( ) 14. Pork ( ) 15. Ice cream ( )
16. Onion ( ) 17. Carrot ( ) 18. Cereal ( )
19. Tea ( ) 20. Mushroom ( ) 21. Cracker ( ) 22. Peas
23. Hamburger ( ) 24. Beans ( ) 25. Chicken ( )
26. Jam ( ) 27. Yogurt ( ) 28. Orange juice ( ) 29. Milk ( )
30. Lemmon ( ) 31. Spaghetti ( ) 32. Apples ( ) 33. Butter ( )
34. Passion fruit ( ) 35. Strawberry ( ) 36. Oil ( ) 37. Garlic ( )
38. Eggs ( ) 39. Bread ( ) 40. Fish ( )
41. Peach ( ) 42. French fries ( ) 43. Ham ( ) 44. Cheese ( )
45. Fruit salad ( ) 46. Salad ( ) 47. Tomato ( ) 48. Toast ( )
COUNTABLE X UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS
Em inglês, os substantivos são divididos em contáveis e incontáveis (countable and
uncountable nouns). Os contáveis são os substantivos que têm forma no plural e podem ser contados.
Ex.: apples, potatoes, cookies….
Já os substantivos incontáveis não possuem plural e servem para porções ou coisas que não
podem ser contadas. Ex.: one rice, two rices; não contamos arroz, então o certo é dizer Rice, sem
plural.
Caso você queira dizer que tem uma quantidade específica daquela porção, você vai usar as
medidas ou falar do recipiente e isso sim, pode ser contado. Ex.: a / one kilo of coffee, two kilos of
meat, three glasses of water, etc. Entendeu direitinho?
• Em alguns dicionários você pode consultar se o substantivo é contável ou incontável, as
palavras possuem os símbolos [C] para countable nouns, e [U] para uncountable nouns.
• Em certos casos, dependendo da expressão utilizada, o substantivo pode ser contável e
incontável. Ex.: ice cream [U] – não sabemos a quantidade, ice cream cone (casquinha de
sorvete) [C].
• Substantivos abstratos são incontáveis.
• Você pode usar a/an antes de countable nouns apenas no singular.
• Você não pode usar a/an antes de um uncountable noun. Ao invés disso, você deve usar a
medida e assim a palavra se torna countable. Ex.: A grain of sand, a block of ice, a lot of
wisdom.
As seguintes palavras são incontáveis em inglês, mas geralmente contáveis em português:
Information Advice
Weather Equipment
News Medicine
Hair Furniture
Fruit Vacation
Music Bread
Por serem incontáveis, é comum que, com essas palavras, para que se dê uma ideia de plural,
usemos expressões como a piece of, a bar of, a pint of, a liter of, a glass of, a can of, etc. Se assim
acontecer, lembre-se de que essas expressões têm plural:
Ex: Would you like a piece of cheese? I have some pieces of advice for you. She bought two bars of soap in the market.
Se uma palavra é incontável, o verbo que a acompanha deve estar obrigatoriamente no
singular:
The news is amazing. The weather is nice today. The information was given last night.
Let’s practice?!?!
5) Label the food pictures (above) in the vocabulary exercise [C] or [U], countable or
uncountable according to the picture (se você não souber a quantidade certa, ou não puder
numerar a quantidade no plural, o substantivo é incontável).
6) Countable or Uncountable? Some of the following sentences contain mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them.
1. How many money do you have in the bank?
2. How many dollars do you get for 1000 Euros?
3. My brother is lonely because he has only little friends.
4. We have a little time left so we need to hurry.
5. I read his message many times and I don’t understand it.
6. How many times does it take to go from London to New York?
7. There are not many furniture in this room so there is lots of space.
8. I bought two clothes this weekend, a jacket and a little pants.
9. We had very little bad weather this year.
10. The news about the company’s profits were very bad.
Grammar
Quantifiers
Já vimos que um substantivo em inglês pode ser contável ou incontável. Dependendo dessa
característica, certas palavras poderão ou não acompanhá-lo. Os quantifiers são quantificadores,
adjetivos, pronomes e artigos que usamos para qualificar os substantivos em termos de quantidade.
Veja a tabela seguinte:
Countable Uncountable
A/an -
Any (of) Any
Some Some
Few/ a few Little/ a little
(How) many (How) much
A lot of/ lots of A lot of/ lots of
Observe os exemplos a seguir:
Would you like an apple? I need some new shoes. Would you like some tea? I have few/a few friends. How much money do you have? How many girlfriends does he have? I got a lot of/ lots of presents. Let´s make a lot of/ lots of money.
Fonte: Blog Dicas e Regras de Inglês
• Usamos some para quantidades indefinidas ou desconhecidas apenas em frases positivas ou
para oferecer ou pedir algo. Ex.: I have some money at the bank. Can I have some water?
• Any é usado em frases interrogativas ou negativas. Ex.: I don’t have any free time during the
week. Do you need any help?
Vamos utilizar novamente as perguntas do começo desta aula para observarmos o uso dos
quantifiers:
How much water do you drink a day? How much coffee do you drink a day?
Uncountable nouns
• Full answers
+ I drink a lot of water.
+ I drink quite a lot of coffee.
- I don’t drink much water.
- I don’t drink any coffee.
• Short answers
+ A lot (muito)
+ Quite a lot (bastante).
- Not much (não muito).
- None (nenhum, nada).
Countable nouns
How many candies do you eat a day? How many hamburgers do you eat a day?
• Full answers
+ I eat a lot of hamburgers.
+ I eat quite a lot of candies.
- I don’t eat many candies.
- I don’t eat any hamburgers.
• Short answers
+ A lot.
+ Quite a lot.
- Not many.
- None.
It’s time to exercise!
1) Choose the correct quantifier (much, any, many, lots of, a lot, little, a little).
a. They had __________________ homework in mathematics.
b. How __________________ time do you need to finish the work?
c. There are too __________________ students in the library.
d. Did you visit __________________ foreign country?
e. Although he's very ill, he didn't take __________________ medicine.
f. __________________ people know as much about linguistics as John does.
g. They say __________________ medicine is a dangerous thing.
h. He's having __________________ of trouble passing his driving test.
i. I spend __________________ of my time reading novels.
j. He knows __________________ English.
2) Complete the questions using how much / how many:
__________________ lemonade have we got? Not much.
__________________ bottles are there? Three.
__________________ meat is there? We have got two steaks.
__________________ bananas have we got? We haven’t got any.
__________________ sugar have we got? Enough.
__________________ bread have we got? Some.
__________________ bikes are there in the garden? Two.
__________________ milk have we got? About one and a half litre.
__________________ years is this wine old? It’s 22 years old.
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
MEASURES (medidas)
1 inch (in) = 1 polegada = 2,54 centímetros;
1 foot (ft) = 1 pé = 30,48 centímetros;
1 yard (yd) = 1 jarda = 91 centímetros;
1 mile* = 1 milha = 1.609 quilômetros;
1 league = 1 légua = 4.828 milhas.
1 libra (lb) = 0,454gramas
1 once (oz) = 28,35 gramas
1 cup ( xícara) = 0,2371 litros
1 gallon (gal) = 3.7851 litros
Pronunciation
Vamos aproveitar o novo vocabulário desta aula para estudar a pronúncia de alguns sons.
Veja:
/ / /####/ /����/ /����/
glass healthy dinner sugar
1) Complete the table above with words from the box.
Bread
Candies
Fish
Hamburger
How
Passion fruit
Spaghetti
Yogurt
2) Add two more words from this lesson to each column. Use a dictionary.
(http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074). Check with your tutor and practice the
pronunciation at www.say.expressivo.com.
Summary
Na aula de hoje estudamos um novo vocabulário referente a comida, bebida e refeições por
meio de substantivos contáveis e incontáveis em inglês. Além disso, ainda vimos os quantifiers,
usados para falar de quantidades e número de substantivos, plural ou singular. Vimos também novas
expressões e palavras que não têm plural e como utilizá-las. A pronúncia também teve destaque na
aula de hoje, com novos sons de consoantes. Nosso objetivo neste curso é fazer com que você
entenda e pratique a língua inglesa no seu ambiente de trabalho. Não se esqueça de tirar suas dúvidas
e de estudar tudo de novo para que você aprenda bem! Seu aprendizado depende de seu esforço!
See you next class!!!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Blog Dicas e Regras de Inglês (postado por Nara). Online. Disponível em:
http://dicasingles.blogspot.com/2007/03/countable-and-uncountable-nouns.html. Acesso em: 12 dez.
2010.
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 15th Lesson
How much coffee and water do you drink a day?
Aim
Conhecer novas palavras e um novo vocabulário que inclui comida, bebida e
substantivos contáveis e incontáveis de modo geral.
Conhecer os quantifiers do inglês, palavras muito importantes para falarmos de
quantidade.
Aprimorar a pronúncia de mais alguns sons das consoantes.
Introduction
Hello! How are you?
Hoje é dia de estudar inglês! Novas estruturas gramaticais, novas palavras e a pronúncia de
novos sons da língua inglesa esperam por você nesta aula.
Enjoy your class!
Speaking & Reading
3) Read the conversations below:
Talking about coffee
A: How much coffee do you drink?
B: About 8 cups a day.
A: That's too much!
B: How many cups of coffee do you drink?
A: No more than 2 cups a day.
B: That's not enough.
Talking about water
A: How much water do you drink?
B: About a glass.
A: That's not enough.
B: How many glasses of water do you drink?
A: At least 8 glasses a day.
B: That's too much.
8 cups of coffee is unhealthy*. 8 glasses of water is healthy**. Coffee is usually recommended by
doctors (2 cups maximum) and water is always recommended by doctors (8-12 glasses is the
recommended standard).
*Unhealthy = it’s not good for you. Não é saudável para você.
**Healthy = it’s good for you. É saudável para você.
Agora, responda à seguinte pergunta:
4) How much water do you drink a day? How many cups of coffee do you drink a day?
_________________________________________________________________________________
Vocabulary
FOOD
2) Write B for Breakfast, S for Snack (lanche), L for Lunch and D for Dinner.
1. Pineapple ( ) 2. Sugar ( ) 3. Sweetening ( ) 4. Lettuce ( )
5. Rice ( ) 6. Bananas ( ) 7. Potatoes ( )
8. Chocolate ( ) 9. Cookies ( ) 10. Cake ( ) 11. Candies ( )
12. Coffee ( ) 13. Meat ( ) 14. Pork ( ) 15. Ice cream ( )
16. Onion ( ) 17. Carrot ( ) 18. Cereal ( )
19. Tea ( ) 20. Mushroom ( ) 21. Cracker ( ) 22. Peas
23. Hamburger ( ) 24. Beans ( ) 25. Chicken ( )
26. Jam ( ) 27. Yogurt ( ) 28. Orange juice ( ) 29. Milk ( )
30. Lemmon ( ) 31. Spaghetti ( ) 32. Apples ( ) 33. Butter ( )
34. Passion fruit ( ) 35. Strawberry ( ) 36. Oil ( ) 37. Garlic ( )
38. Eggs ( ) 39. Bread ( ) 40. Fish ( )
41. Peach ( ) 42. French fries ( ) 43. Ham ( ) 44. Cheese ( )
45. Fruit salad ( ) 46. Salad ( ) 47. Tomato ( ) 48. Toast ( )
COUNTABLE X UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS
Em inglês, os substantivos são divididos em contáveis e incontáveis (countable and
uncountable nouns). Os contáveis são os substantivos que têm forma no plural e podem ser contados.
Ex.: apples, potatoes, cookies….
Já os substantivos incontáveis não possuem plural e servem para porções ou coisas que não
podem ser contadas. Ex.: one rice, two rices; não contamos arroz, então o certo é dizer Rice, sem
plural.
Caso você queira dizer que tem uma quantidade específica daquela porção, você vai usar as
medidas ou falar do recipiente e isso sim, pode ser contado. Ex.: a / one kilo of coffee, two kilos of
meat, three glasses of water, etc. Entendeu direitinho?
• Em alguns dicionários você pode consultar se o substantivo é contável ou incontável, as
palavras possuem os símbolos [C] para countable nouns, e [U] para uncountable nouns.
• Em certos casos, dependendo da expressão utilizada, o substantivo pode ser contável e
incontável. Ex.: ice cream [U] – não sabemos a quantidade, ice cream cone (casquinha de
sorvete) [C].
• Substantivos abstratos são incontáveis.
• Você pode usar a/an antes de countable nouns apenas no singular.
• Você não pode usar a/an antes de um uncountable noun. Ao invés disso, você deve usar a
medida e assim a palavra se torna countable. Ex.: A grain of sand, a block of ice, a lot of
wisdom.
As seguintes palavras são incontáveis em inglês, mas geralmente contáveis em português:
Information Advice
Weather Equipment
News Medicine
Hair Furniture
Fruit Vacation
Music Bread
Por serem incontáveis, é comum que, com essas palavras, para que se dê uma ideia de plural,
usemos expressões como a piece of, a bar of, a pint of, a liter of, a glass of, a can of, etc. Se assim
acontecer, lembre-se de que essas expressões têm plural:
Ex: Would you like a piece of cheese? I have some pieces of advice for you. She bought two bars of soap in the market.
Se uma palavra é incontável, o verbo que a acompanha deve estar obrigatoriamente no
singular:
The news is amazing. The weather is nice today. The information was given last night.
Let’s practice?!?!
7) Label the food pictures (above) in the vocabulary exercise [C] or [U], countable or
uncountable according to the picture (se você não souber a quantidade certa, ou não puder
numerar a quantidade no plural, o substantivo é incontável).
8) Countable or Uncountable? Some of the following sentences contain mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them.
1. How many money do you have in the bank?
2. How many dollars do you get for 1000 Euros?
3. My brother is lonely because he has only little friends.
4. We have a little time left so we need to hurry.
5. I read his message many times and I don’t understand it.
6. How many times does it take to go from London to New York?
7. There are not many furniture in this room so there is lots of space.
8. I bought two clothes this weekend, a jacket and a little pants.
9. We had very little bad weather this year.
10. The news about the company’s profits were very bad.
Grammar
Quantifiers
Já vimos que um substantivo em inglês pode ser contável ou incontável. Dependendo dessa
característica, certas palavras poderão ou não acompanhá-lo. Os quantifiers são quantificadores,
adjetivos, pronomes e artigos que usamos para qualificar os substantivos em termos de quantidade.
Veja a tabela seguinte:
Countable Uncountable
A/an -
Any (of) Any
Some Some
Few/ a few Little/ a little
(How) many (How) much
A lot of/ lots of A lot of/ lots of
Observe os exemplos a seguir:
Would you like an apple? I need some new shoes. Would you like some tea? I have few/a few friends. How much money do you have? How many girlfriends does he have? I got a lot of/ lots of presents. Let´s make a lot of/ lots of money.
Fonte: Blog Dicas e Regras de Inglês
• Usamos some para quantidades indefinidas ou desconhecidas apenas em frases positivas ou
para oferecer ou pedir algo. Ex.: I have some money at the bank. Can I have some water?
• Any é usado em frases interrogativas ou negativas. Ex.: I don’t have any free time during the
week. Do you need any help?
Vamos utilizar novamente as perguntas do começo desta aula para observarmos o uso dos
quantifiers:
How much water do you drink a day? How much coffee do you drink a day?
Uncountable nouns
• Full answers
+ I drink a lot of water.
+ I drink quite a lot of coffee.
- I don’t drink much water.
- I don’t drink any coffee.
• Short answers
+ A lot (muito)
+ Quite a lot (bastante).
- Not much (não muito).
- None (nenhum, nada).
Countable nouns
How many candies do you eat a day? How many hamburgers do you eat a day?
• Full answers
+ I eat a lot of hamburgers.
+ I eat quite a lot of candies.
- I don’t eat many candies.
- I don’t eat any hamburgers.
• Short answers
+ A lot.
+ Quite a lot.
- Not many.
- None.
It’s time to exercise!
3) Choose the correct quantifier (much, any, many, lots of, a lot, little, a little).
a. They had __________________ homework in mathematics.
b. How __________________ time do you need to finish the work?
c. There are too __________________ students in the library.
d. Did you visit __________________ foreign country?
e. Although he's very ill, he didn't take __________________ medicine.
f. __________________ people know as much about linguistics as John does.
g. They say __________________ medicine is a dangerous thing.
h. He's having __________________ of trouble passing his driving test.
i. I spend __________________ of my time reading novels.
j. He knows __________________ English.
4) Complete the questions using how much / how many:
__________________ lemonade have we got? Not much.
__________________ bottles are there? Three.
__________________ meat is there? We have got two steaks.
__________________ bananas have we got? We haven’t got any.
__________________ sugar have we got? Enough.
__________________ bread have we got? Some.
__________________ bikes are there in the garden? Two.
__________________ milk have we got? About one and a half litre.
__________________ years is this wine old? It’s 22 years old.
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
MEASURES (medidas)
1 inch (in) = 1 polegada = 2,54 centímetros;
1 foot (ft) = 1 pé = 30,48 centímetros;
1 yard (yd) = 1 jarda = 91 centímetros;
1 mile* = 1 milha = 1.609 quilômetros;
1 league = 1 légua = 4.828 milhas.
1 libra (lb) = 0,454gramas
1 once (oz) = 28,35 gramas
1 cup ( xícara) = 0,2371 litros
1 gallon (gal) = 3.7851 litros
Pronunciation
Vamos aproveitar o novo vocabulário desta aula para estudar a pronúncia de alguns sons.
Veja:
/ / /####/ /����/ /����/
glass healthy dinner sugar
3) Complete the table above with words from the box.
Bread
Candies
Fish
Hamburger
How
Passion fruit
Spaghetti
Yogurt
4) Add two more words from this lesson to each column. Use a dictionary.
(http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074). Check with your tutor and practice the
pronunciation at www.say.expressivo.com.
Summary
Na aula de hoje estudamos um novo vocabulário referente a comida, bebida e refeições por
meio de substantivos contáveis e incontáveis em inglês. Além disso, ainda vimos os quantifiers,
usados para falar de quantidades e número de substantivos, plural ou singular. Vimos também novas
expressões e palavras que não têm plural e como utilizá-las. A pronúncia também teve destaque na
aula de hoje, com novos sons de consoantes. Nosso objetivo neste curso é fazer com que você
entenda e pratique a língua inglesa no seu ambiente de trabalho. Não se esqueça de tirar suas dúvidas
e de estudar tudo de novo para que você aprenda bem! Seu aprendizado depende de seu esforço!
See you next class!!!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Blog Dicas e Regras de Inglês (postado por Nara). Online. Disponível em:
http://dicasingles.blogspot.com/2007/03/countable-and-uncountable-nouns.html. Acesso em: 12 dez.
2010.
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 16th Lesson
Are you going to get a new passport?
Introduction Aim
Aprender como usar os verbos em inglês no tempo futuro.
Hi! What’s up?
Está na hora de praticar e aprender mais sobre a língua inglesa, não é mesmo? Hoje vamos
prever o futuro, fazer planos e falar de você e suas metas, tudo isso usando uma nova estrutura
gramatical e acrescentando novas palavras ao seu vocabulário.
It’s time to study!
Reading
1) Read a part of the letter Ronald Smith wrote to his secretary about his holiday in
California. He is an important businessman on vacation!
“This place is magic! Yesterday I visited the
dolphins in the middle of the ocean. Then I watched a
show with whales.
Tomorrow I’m going to climb a mountain and
I’m going to try bungee jumping. I hope I don’t get
hurt! The day after tomorrow I’m going to sail with my
new friends and we’re going to visit a desert island on
the north coast. We’re going to stay there all day long,
sunbathing and swimming… isn’t it great? I’m in
paradise!”
Reading comprehension
1. Is he talking about…? (More than one option is possible.)
a. the past b. the present c. the future
2. Is he enjoying his vacation?
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. Find three plans he makes for “tomorrow”.
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Grammar
O que são as expressões sublinhadas na carta acima? Você compreende a função delas nesse
contexto?
_________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Usamos estruturas como as grifadas no texto acima quando temos um plano já definido sobre
o futuro antes da fala, como nos exemplos retirados da carta de Ronald:
- I’m going to climb a mountain tomorrow.
- I’m going to try bungee jumping.
Se quisermos falar sobre Ronald Smith, podemos dizer:
- He’s going to sail with his friends.
- They’re going to visit a desert island.
Ou seja, a estrutura é feita com o verbo to be + going to + verbo principal no infinitivo, sendo que
a única variação se dá no verbo to be e no verbo principal, que muda de acordo com o que é falado.
Affirmative Negative
I am
You are
He is
She is going to visit another country.
It is
We are
They are
I’m not
You aren’t
She isn’t
He isn’t going to visit another country.
It isn’t
We aren’t
They aren’t
Você já sabe como formamos a estrutura negativa e a interrogativa, não é? Claro que sim!
São formadas da mesma maneira que fazemos com todas as estruturas com o verbo to be.
Am I Yes, you are. / No, you aren’t.
Are you Yes, I am . / No, I’m not.
Is she Yes, she is. / No, she isn’t.
Is he going to visit another country? Yes, he is. / No, he isn’t.
Is it Yes, it is. / No, it isn’t.
Are we Yes, we are. / No, we aren’t.
Are they Yes, they are. / No, they aren’t.
Também utilizamos going to para fazer previsões e falar de coisas que achamos que vão
acontecer, geralmente com base em algum indício. Ex.:
- It’s going to rain tonight! (The clouds are dark.)
- I think I’m going to be sick. (I feel terrible now.)
• Como going to é uma estrutura usada para falar do futuro, vamos associá-la a certas
expressões de tempo como: tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, next year, next
holiday...
Practice
1) Write a question with going to for each situation.
Example: Your friend won some money in the lottery yesterday. You ask:
(what/ do with it?) What are you going to do with it?____________________________
a) Your friend is going to have a job interview tomorrow afternoon. You ask:
(what/ wear?) ___________________________________________________________
b) Your friend bought a new computer last month. You ask:
(where/ put it?) _________________________________________________________
c) Your friend decided to have a party tomorrow night. You ask?
(who/ invite?)__________________________________________________________
2) Use your prediction skills and say what’s going to happen next in these situations.
Example: Emma is driving. There is very little gas left in the tank. The nearest gas station is 30
miles from there. (run out) She’s going to run out of gas._____________________
a) There are a lot of black clouds in the sky. (rain) It ______________________________________
____________________________
b) It is 8:30 a.m. Jack is leaving his house. He has to be at work at 8:45 but the journey takes 30
minutes. (late) He _________________________________________________________________
c) A man is holding a big box and he can’t see where he’s walking. There is a hole in front of him.
(fall) He _________________________________________________________________________
3) Ronald Smith is going to travel to Italy on business for a week. Check his schedule
below and write sentences with going to.
Day Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday 8 a.m.
to 10 a.m.
Opening ceremony
Meeting with staff
Visit Rome Meeting with the president
Conference Free Free
12 p.m.
Free Lunch with staff
Free Japanese restaurant
Free Visit Venice
Free
2 p.m. to
4 p.m.
Speech at convention center
Meeting with the president
Speech at convention center
Visit the Vatican city
Meeting with the president
Free
6 p.m. 8 p.m.
Dinner with the staff
Dinner with president
Dinner with the staff
Dinner at the hotel
Dinner with the staff
Free Free
10 p.m. Sleep early Walk around
Go downtown
Farewell party
Pack my luggage
Go to the airport
Free
4) Write about each day of Mr. Smith’s business trip (at least 2 activities). Don’t forget to
use the GOING + TO structure!
On Monday he is __________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
On Tuesday he is __________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
On Wednesday he is ________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
On Thursday he is _________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
On Friday he is ____________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
On Sunday he is ___________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Vocabulary
At the airport
1) Match the words in column A with the definitions in column B.
a) duty free shop. ( ) the place where your passport is checked.
b) check-in desk ( ) the moment when a plane starts flying.
c) take off ( ) the place where you can buy things at good prices.
d) baggage claim ( ) the bags or hand luggage you keep with you inside the plane
e) immigration control ( ) the place where you have your tickets checked.
f) carry-on luggage ( ) the place where you have your baggage back when you
arrive at your destination.
2) Answer the questions about you.
a) What time are you going to get up tomorrow?
_____________________________________________________________________________
b) What are you going to wear tomorrow?
_____________________________________________________________________________
c) What are you going to do at home tonight?
_____________________________________________________________________________
d) What are you going to eat for dinner?
_____________________________________________________________________________
e) Where are you going to go for your next holiday?
_____________________________________________________________________________
f) When are you going to travel on business?
_____________________________________________________________________________
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
Holidays - Leisure
OUTDOOR ACTIVITIES
go camping go fishing do extreme sports
visit monuments go to a shopping center go jogging
INDOOR ACTIVITIES
play chess/cards surf/chat on the internet send/receive e-mails
take a nap play the drums go bowling
(a musical instrument)
1) Make plans about your next weekend with going to. Choose some outdoor and indoor
activities you would like to do.
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
THE WEATHER
1) Dê uma olhada lá do lado de fora de sua janela e tente responder: “What’s the weather
like?”
Is it sunny? Is it rainy? Is it snowy? Is it cloudy?
•
•
• A terceira opção: “It’s snowy” é pouco provável na maior parte do Brasil. E aí, conseguiu
responder à pergunta? Veja mais algumas formas:
It’s windy. It’s stormy. It’s cold. It’s hot.
2) Find what’s the weather like at this moment in São Paulo (Brazil), Houston (USA) and
Melbourne (Australia).
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Pronunciation
Consonant sounds
Bem, meu caro aluno. Agora vamos estudar mais alguns sons das consoantes. Lembre-se de
usar um dicionário, como o http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074, online.
5) Complete the table with words from the box below.
Chess
Stay
Tomorrow
Travel
Trip
Visit
Use
Yesterday
/����/ /����/ /����/ /!!!!/
very rain swimming year
/����/ /����/ /����/ /!!!!/
6) Add two more words from this lesson to each column. Check and practice the
pronunciation at www.say.expressivo.com.
Writing
1) Congratulations! A new airline company offered you plane tickets for a trip abroad for
5 days on your next holiday! All you have to do is to fill in the form below and decide
where to go. Tick (����) your choices!
1 a ( ) go to the beach b ( ) go to the countryside c ( ) go to the mountains
2 a ( ) in January b ( ) in July c ( ) other
3 a ( ) in the summer b ( ) in the winter c ( ) any
4 a ( ) at a hotel b ( ) at a hostel c ( ) at a campsite
5 a ( ) go with your friends b ( ) go with your husband / wife c ( ) go with your parents
2) Now, you have to write an e-mail to the airline company with your choices and wait for
their answer! Answer the questions according to the options you ticked (����) above.
• Where are you going to go?
• When are you going to go?
• Where are you going to stay?
• Who are you going to go with?
I’m going to_______________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Summary
Gostou de falar sobre seus planos para o futuro e sobre suas futuras férias? Pois é, mas, antes
das férias escolares, você ainda tem muito o que estudar. Apenas passamos da metade do curso.
Temos ainda mais 14 aulas nas quais você vai desenvolver, além de gramática, vocabulário e
pronúncia. Vamos desenvolver também sua capacidade de se comunicar e negociar em inglês. Hoje
falamos de planos e previsões, vimos novas expressões ligadas ao seu lazer e a pronúncia de mais
alguns sons das consoantes. Que tal, para praticar o conteúdo da aula de hoje, você mandar um e-
mail para o seu tutor falando de seus objetivos e metas como aluno e como profissional? Esse é um
método muito eficaz de colocar em prática e fixar a nova matéria de hoje!
Keep on studying!!! Bye bye!
Ana Célia Lima
Viviane Gomes Pontes
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
( ) Houston, USA
• 17th Lesson
( ) Melbourne, Australia
Which one is the biggest?
( ) São Paulo, Brazil
Introduction
Hey! Good morning! Good afternoon! Good evening!
É hora do inglês! Hoje temos muita coisa nova para estudar! Gramática, vocabulário e
pronúncia sempre fazem parte de nossas aulas e têm a função de ajudá-lo a desenvolver suas
competências linguísticas no aprendizado de inglês.
Aim
Compreender como funcionam os adjetivos nos graus comparativo e superlativo.
Enriquecer o vocabulário relacionado a adjetivos de personalidade.
Treinar os sons de outras consoantes.
Have a nice class!
Reading
1) Read the text below.
a. b.
c. d.
I can run one hundred meters in one minute. I can complete a forty-kilometer marathon in five hours. I’m not a professional athlete but I’m faster than most of them.
Do you think I am fat? I’m not. I am stronger than all my friends. When I was younger, around twelve, I could carry my nine-year-old brother in my hands.
I’ve been practicing physical exercises since I was five. I was five when I could ride a bike. I’m fifteen now and I’m fitter than all my friends.
My alarm clock goes off at 6 a.m., but I wake up at seven. It takes me two hours to get dressed in the morning. When my friends and I eat a three-course dinner they are finished with dessert before I am done with my appetizers. I am slower than everyone I know.
Reading comprehension
2) Answer according to the texts:
a. Which text describes a strong and fat man? ____
b. Which text describes a fit and sporty man? ____
c. Which text describes a lazy and slow man? ____
d. Which text describes a fast runner? ____
3) Em qual dos textos o personagem não se compara com seus amigos? ____
Grammar
COMPARATIVE ADJECTIVES
Observe as seguintes palavras: faster, stronger, younger, fitter, slower. O que elas têm em
comum além da terminação -er?
Elas são os adjetivos: fast, strong, young, fit, slow.
Mas para que serve a terminação -er seguida do than?
Juntas elas fazem a forma comparativa do adjetivo. Veja outros exemplos:
- I am smaller than my sister. - She is older than her husband.
• Usamos a forma comparativa de um adjetivo + than para estabelecer uma comparação entre
dois lugares, pessoas, animais, coisas, etc. Ex.:
- Tokyo is bigger than Madrid. - Paul is taller than Mark.
• Para formar o grau comparativo de adjetivos de uma sílaba, acrescente -er ao adjetivo. Se o
adjetivo terminar em –e, acrescente apenas –r. Ex.:
- London is larger than New York. - Mike is faster than Ben.
• Para formar o comparativo de adjetivos longos (duas sílabas ou mais), acrescente a palavra
more antes do adjetivo. Ex.:
- Frank is more romantic than Peter. - A car is more expensive than a bike.
• Quando um adjetivo de uma sílaba terminar em consoante + vogal + consoante (CVC), nós
dobramos a última consoante e acrescentamos –er. Ex.:
- Rio is hot but Dubai is hotter (than Rio). - Julie is thin but Maria is thinner (than Julie).
• Quando um adjetivo de duas sílabas terminar em –y, troque o –y por –i e acrescente –er.
- Frank is happier than Peter. - Roger is busier than Carl.
• Good, bad e far têm formas comparativas irregulares. Veja:
- Sue is better (good) than Sally.
- Michael is worse (bad) than Paul.
- This beach is farther (far) than I thought.
Practice
1) Complete the sentences using a comparative form and the adjectives in the box.
a) Rio is big but Mexico city is _____________ than Rio.
b) Robert is ________than Mary. He has millions of dollars at the bank and she doesn’t.
c) This restaurant is good but the other one is _______________.
d) My car is __________________ than yours. (My car: $90 mi- Yours: $75 mi)
e) This computer is very bad but the one we had before was _______________.
f) It’s ________________ to send an e-mail than to write an letter to our boss.
g) My dog is _____________ than yours. He always obeys me when I give him orders.
h) We need someone ______________ than George to carry all those boxes.
i) New York is _____________ than Mumbai.
2) Give the comparative forms of the adjectives below:
a) thin _________________ b) old __________________
c) fat___________________ d) handsome __________________
e) lucky _________________ f) cold ______________________
g) important ________________ h) good __________________
Intelligent good strong populated bad rich expensive hot easy
i) bad _____________________ j) far_____________________
3) Write 4 sentences using the comparatives.
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
SUPERLATIVE ADJECTIVES
1) Read the following examples:
I’m better at mathematics than my brother. I’m the best at maths in my work.
His boss is younger than him . He’s the youngest in the office.
Tina is more intelligent than my secretary. Tina is the most intelligent girl at university.
John is busier than his boss. John is the busiest worker in his company.
• Usamos a forma superlativa de um adjetivo para comparar um lugar, pessoa, animal ou coisa,
etc. com o restante do grupo. Ex.:
- Rio and Paris are big cities, but I believe Mexico City is the biggest city in the world (comparando
Mexico às outras cidades do mundo).
Agora é sua vez! Analise os exemplos acima e estabeleça a diferença entre as formas
comparativa e superlativa dos adjetivos e tente descobrir as regras!
Ponto para você que descobriu que as regras se parecem com a do comparativo dos adjetivos!
Com a exceção de que não acrescentamos –er ou –ier e sim –est ou –iest.
• Lembre-se de que, como comparamos uma pessoa ou coisa a um grupo, usamos o artigo the.
Ex.: the best, the strongest, the fastest, the busiest, the most interesting. Observe mais
exemplos:
- London is the largest city in England. - Mike is the fastest runner in the race.
- Rio is one of the hottest cities in Brazil. - Russia is the biggest country in Europe.
- São Paulo is the noisiest city in Brazil. - This is the easiest job I’ve ever taken.
• Para formar o superlativo de adjetivos longos (duas ou mais sílabas), acrescente the most
antes do adjetivo. Ex.:
- Frank is the most important manager here.
- Planes are the most expensive vehicles.
• Good, bad e far têm formas comparativas irregulares.
Sue is the best (good) co-worker in the company.
Michael is the worst (bad) employer here.
This city is the farthest (far) that I’ve ever visited.
Practice
1) Fill in the gaps with superlative forms of the adjectives in the box.
a. The sun is the __________________star in the sky.
b. I laughed a lot last night at the meeting. David is the _________________ co-worker we have.
c. I don’t have a lot of money, so I am going to buy the _______________ house I can find.
d. The _________________ sport in Brazil is definitely soccer.
e. Where did you get that book? Did you know it is the ______________ book about economy?
f. Joseph traveled from Miami to Russia last year by plane. That was the _______________ ride he
had.
g. The bank that is ______________ to our house is 10 kilometers away.
h. That airline company has the ________________ planes I ever seen. There are 800 seats there!
i. My boss’ chair is the ______________ chair I ever sit in. It’s really confortable!
j. The street I drove to work on this morning is the _______________ street in my town.
2) Read about these cities.
____ Madrid
Population: A little more than 3 million people.
Size: 230 square miles.
Transportation: Madrid’s Barajas Airport is about 15 miles away from the city center.
Climate: In the summer, Madrid reaches 95 degrees Fahrenheit.
__________________________ Chicago
BRIGHT FUNNY LARGE NARROW RARE CHEAP CLOSE POPULAR LONG SOFT
Population: 3 million people.
Size: 250 square miles.
Transportation: Chicago’s O’hare Airport is about 20 miles away from the city center.
Climate: In the summer, Chicago reaches 80 degrees Fahrenheit.
Tokyo
Population: 12 million people.
Size: 600 square miles.
Transportation: Tokyo’s International Airport is about 40 miles away from the city center.
Climate: In the summer, Tokyo reaches 90 degrees Fahrenheit.
Rio de Janeiro
Population: 8 million people.
Size: 500 square miles.
Transportation: Rio de Janeiro’s Galeão Airport is about 10 miles away from the city center.
Climate: In the summer, Rio de Janeiro reaches 90 degrees Fahrenheit.
a) Compare Chicago and Tokyo.
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
b) Compare Rio, Madrid and Chicago.
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Vocabulary
PERSONALITY ADJECTIVES
Agora veremos alguns adjetivos para descrever pessoas, o que vai enriquecer seu vocabulário.
Algumas palavras são parecidas com o português, mas, caso tenha dúvidas, consulte um dicionário.
Sugestão: Dicionário Michaelis Online
http://michaelis.uol.com.br/moderno/ingles/index
Positive Personality Adjectives
cheerful kind responsible
cooperative lovely silly
dynamic lucky successful
enthusiastic modern talented
fair peaceful unusual
faithful pleasant warm
friendly punctual wise
generous proud willing
hilarious receptive
Negative Personality Adjectives
afraid embarrassed nervous
ambiguous forgetful strange
angry hungry selfish
annoyed jealous snobbish
ashamed lazy tired
anxious lonely upset
careless mean weak
clumsy naive worried
dangerous
• Para saber sobre a personalidade de alguém, geralmente usamos a pergunta: “What’s she/he
like?” Ex.: -What’s Mr. Smith like?
- He’s very smart, punctual and enthusiastic!
• Quando utilizamos a pergunta: “What does he/she look like?” queremos nos referir à
aparência da pessoa. Ex.: -What does Mr. Smith like?
-He’s very tall, young and handsome!
Practice
1) Match the columns.
a) generous ( ) she does not give attention to what she is doing
b) jealous ( ) she believes things too easily and does not have enough experience.
c) kind ( )she wants what other people have. She doesn’t like others to succeed.
d) lazy ( ) she’s nice, gentle and helpful
e) mean ( ) she doesn’t like to work or exercise. She’s happy doing nothing.
f) careless ( ) she doesn’t like spending money, specially on other people.
g) naïve ( ) she likes to give presents and to help other people.
2) Let’s talk about you!
a. Who is the most intelligent person in your family? _________________________________
b. Who is the most boring workmate you know? _____________________________________
c. Who is the tallest person in your family? _________________________________________
d. Who is the busiest person at work? _____________________________________________
Pronunciation
Vamos aproveitar o novo vocabulário desta aula, principalmente de adjetivos, para estudar a
pronúncia de mais alguns sons das consoantes? Let’s go!
/����/ /����/ /""""/
����at s����rong la""""y
1) Complete the table above with one word from this lesson according to the consonant
sound.
2) Circle the word with the consonant sound that doesn’t rhyme.
����at ����ast love physical
s����rong important populated tall
la""""y busy dessert expensive
• Use a dictionary (http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074). Check with your tutor and
practice the pronunciation at www.say.expressivo.com.
Summary
Nosso objetivo é transmitir o conhecimento básico e imprescindível para que você se
comunique, leia e entenda a língua inglesa tão necessária para o seu sucesso no mercado de trabalho.
Hoje vimos uma matéria importante, que lhe permite comparar, de formas diferentes, pessoas, coisas
e lugares. Vimos também um vocabulário de adjetivos de personalidade e na parte de pronúncia
vimos outros sons de consoantes. Faça os exercícios desta aula e pratique falando sobre as pessoas
que você conhece. Estabeleça comparações no seu ambiente familiar ou de trabalho. Esse será o seu
homework!
See you!!!
Ana Célia Lima
Viviane Gomes Pontes
REFERÊNCIAS
Dicionário Michaelis. Online. Disponível em: http://michaelis.uol.com.br/moderno/ingles/index.
Acesso em: 13 nov. 2010.
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 18th Lesson
Would you like another cup of coffee?
Introduction
Hello! How are you, dear student?
Que tal estudarmos um pouco de gramática, vocabulário e pronúncia da língua inglesa?
Temos muito a aprender com a aula de hoje!
It’s time! Are you ready?
Reading
1) Read the dialogues below:
Aim
Entender os usos do verbo “to like” em duas estruturas e funções diferentes.
Conhecer alguns advérbios em inglês e como eles são usados.
Treinar a pronúncia de novos sons das consoantes segundo o alfabeto fonético
internacional.
Oh! I would like to go there someday too…
I like going to Salvador for the Carnival.
a.
b.
c. d.
Você pôde observar o que essas pessoas pensam e ler o que falam. Você notou que elas
usaram o verbo like de 2 diferentes formas para exprimir um desejo ou expressar de que gostam?
Assim:
a. I like going to Salvador.
b. He would like to go to Salvador or He’d like to go to Salvador.
Qual (ou quais) das expressões expressa(m) um desejo?
Qual (ou quais) das expressões representa(m) um gosto ou preferência?
Grammar
Like x Would like
We like getting to know different
places riding our bikes.
I’d like to be like my parents...
Usamos a expressão would like quando queremos exprimir um desejo ou plano. Você reparou
qual a forma dos verbos após a expressão would like? Observe os exemplos acima.
• Quando usamos would like, devemos usar em seguida verbos no infinitivo. Ex.: I really
would like to travel on my next holiday.
• Would é frequentemente reduzido para ‘d na forma falada. Ex.: She’d like to buy a new car
next year.
Outros exemplos:
-What kind of food do you like? (expressa verdades, preferências pessoais)
-I like ice cream and bananas.
-I like Chinese food.
What kind of food would you like?
(expressa a possibilidade de escolher ou de oferecer algo)
I would like Italian food. (Eu prefereria comida italiana)
• Veja a diferença entre as duas formas de fazer perguntas usando o verbo like e would like:
Does he like going to Salvador? -Yes, he does.
- No, he doesn’t.
Would you like to go to Salvador? - Yes, I would.
- No, I wouldn’t.
• Note que não precisamos usar “s” na terceira pessoa do singular quando usamos would. Ex.:
He would like to go to Salvador. He would likes to go to Salvador.
Viu a diferença entre as duas formas? Em uma falamos do presente, de preferências em geral;
na outra falamos de situações que podem ou não acontecer no futuro, intenções e desejos.
Hora de praticar!
Practice
1) Complete the sentences. Use the correct form of like or would like.
a) He _____________________ soda with his lunch every day.
b) She _____________________ working overtime once a week.
c) He _____________________ to travel on his next vacation.
d) _____________________ to see that project now?
e) We _____________________ working together. We do it every day.
f) What _____________________ to do now?
2) Fill in the words to complete the sentences using "would like or wouldn't like".
a) You want to do something with your friend tonight. You ask: What _____________________ to
do tonight?
b) You are expressing how much you want to go to Paris. You say: I _____________________ to go
to Paris. I _____________________ to go to Rome.
c) You don't like working as a waiter. You say: I _____________________ to work as a waiter again
in the future.
d) You offer your friend a sandwich. You ask: _____________________ a sandwich?
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
Adverbs
Você estudou previamente (aulas 7 e 17) alguns adjetivos em inglês. E na aula 8 vimos
alguns advérbios de frequência. Você sabe a diferença entre as funções de adjetivos e de advérbios?
Veja nos exemplos abaixo a diferença entre bad e badly:
a. I am a bad driver.
b. I drive badly.
Bom, a função de um adjetivo é dar uma qualidade a um nome (substantivo); já o advérbio
qualifica uma ação (expressa pelo verbo). Agora que você já sabe, identifique nos exemplos acima o
adjetivo e o advérbio.
A maioria dos advérbios de modo (que indicam como uma ação é feita ou como ela acontece)
termina em –ly, como em beautifully (beautiful), carefully (careful). No entanto alguns advérbios são
irregulares e apresentam a mesma forma do adjetivo. É o caso de fast e hard. A grande exceção, mas
que também se encaixa na categoria de advérbio irregular, é o adjetivo good que se transforma no
advérbio well. Assim temos:
He’s a fast runner. (adjective) / He runs fast. (adverb)
Sally is a hard worker. (adjective) / Sally works hard. (adverb)
She is a good (adjective) manager. / She manages the company well (adverb).
Reading
1) Read the text about Alfie and Joey.
Alfie and Joey are mechanics. Alfie has a
good job. He works hard every day. He also
works fast. Alfie has a new car. It’s a fast
car, and it runs well. Joey’s doesn’t have a
good business. He is a slow worker, and he
works only on Mondays. His car was in a bad
accident and runs badly. It’s a very hard
job. He works slowly. Alfie works hard, and
Joey hardly works.
Reading comprehension
1) Answer the questions using the adjectives and adverbs above.
a) Does Alfie have a bad job? No, he doesn’t. He has a good job._________________________
b) Is Alfie a bad worker? ____________________________________________________________
c) Does Alfie work slowly every day? _________________________________________________
d) Is Alfie’s car slow? ______________________________________________________________
e) Does Alfie’s car run badly? _______________________________________________________
f) Does Joey have a good business? ___________________________________________________
g) Is Joey a fast worker? __________________________________________________________
h) Does Joey’s car run well? _______________________________________________________
i) Is Joey’s job easy? _____________________________________________________________
j) Does Joey work fast? ___________________________________________________________
k) Does Alfie work slowly? ________________________________________________________
2) Class Discussion: Practice answering and asking questions below with your friends.
Share the answers with your tutor.
a) How do you work? _______________________________________________________________
b) How do you cook? _______________________________________________________________
c) How do you swim? _______________________________________________________________
d) What kind of student are you? ______________________________________________________
e) How do you dance? ______________________________________________________________
f) What kind of car do you like? _______________________________________________________
3) Correct the mistakes in the following sentences:
Example: My English teacher speaks too fastly fast, so I can’t understand him.
a) Kate drives careful because she doesn’t want to have an accident.
b) Brian came to work lately today.
c) The boss spoke angry with my co-worker today.
d) Chris and Danny can do this job very good.
4) Fill in the words in brackets with adjective or adverb.
a) He reads a book _______________. (quick)
b) He is a ______________ driver. (careful)
c) My secretary speaks ____________ (loud)
d) It was a _____________ (boring) meeting yesterday.
e) Jin speaks Chinese _____________. (fluent)
f) The women work ____________. (hard)
g) Eric likes to sing ____________ songs. (sad)
Vocabulary
Common Adverbs
Suggestion Box (adverbs only)
Badly – beautifully – dangerously – fast – hard – lazily – safely – slowly – well
Adverbs of time (When?)
yesterday
today
tomorrow
now
then
later
tonight
right now
last night
this morning
next week
already
recently
lately
soon
immediately
still
yet
. . . ago
Adverbs of place (Where?)
• Observação: Não use “to” com esses advérbios.
here
there
over there
everywhere
anywhere
nowhere
home
downtown
back
away
out
Adverbs of manner (How?)
• Observação: Nos adjetivos terminados em y troca-se o y pelo i e são acrescentadas as letras –
ily. Ex.: easy – easily.
fast
well
hard
quickly
slowly
carefully
hardly
absolutely
together
alone
lonely
easily
friendly
angrily
happily
Adverbs of frequency (How often?)
frequently
occasionally
seldom
rarely
normally
regularly
every day
once in a while
once a week
twice a day
again
5) Fill in the blanks with the appropriate adverbs (check the lists above). More than one
answer is possible:
5.1) Adverbs of time
a) I shall go to Delhi ________________
b) We have ________________ booked the tickets.
c) The flight was ________________ .
d) Miss Kitty arrived ________________ . She missed the bus.
e) We went to the post-office ________________ .
5.2) Adverbs of place
f) Petit stood ________________the company for two hours.
g) Come ________________ and sit with me.
h) King went ________________ because he was sick.
i) John took his boss _______________ to buy some coffee to the office.
5.3) Adverbs of manner
j) Mrs. Kity works _________________.
k) I need to wear a raincoat because it’s raining _______________.
l) Dr. Brum listens to the patients _________________.
m) Let’s have a break________________.
5.4) Adverbs of frequency
n) She _____________ arrives late at work.
o) Mr. Brown goes to New York______________
p) Oh no! My chauffer had a car crash ______________
q) I______________ have lunch at noon.
Pronunciation
Consonant Sounds /����/ /����/ //
Os sons que vamos estudar na aula de hoje são muito usados também na língua portuguesa,
com exceção do som de /����/ (que é mais “pronunciado”). Vamos utilizar palavras que vimos na aula
de hoje, principalmente adjetivos e advérbios.
Let’s start?!?
/����/ /����/ //
like tomorrow next
7) Complete the table above with words from the box.
Badly
Immediately
Morning
Now
Soon
Well
8) Add two more words from this lesson to each column. Use a dictionary
(http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074). Check with your tutor and practice the
pronunciation of adverbs and adjectives at www.say.expressivo.com.
Summary
Hoje foi dia de conhecer uma nova estrutura gramatical, a expressão would like em contraste
com o verbo to like, e de estudar advérbios. Agora você aprendeu a discernir um advérbio de um
adjetivo, certo? Esperamos que você pratique essas novas estruturas e o vocabulário, pois eles são
muito importantes para desenvolver e otimizar o seu aprendizado, em especial a pronúncia,
extremamente relevante para você que quer se comunicar com o mundo.
Enjoy your study!
Good bye!!!
Ana Célia Lima
Viviane Gomes Pontes
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 19th Lesson
Have you ever traveled abroad?
Aim
Compreender como funciona um novo tempo verbal chamado Present Perfect.
Contrastar o uso do Present Perfect com o uso do Past Simple, já estudado.
Enriquecer o vocabulário com novas palavras e alguns particípios de verbos.
Conhecer novos sons de consoantes em inglês.
Introduction
Hi! Are you OK?
Na aula de hoje vamos estudar um novo tempo verbal e temos novos verbos a aprender, desta
vez no particípio, além de gramática e vocabulário. Temos ainda a pronúncia de sons muito
importantes na língua inglesa!
Shall we start?
Grammar
1) Take a look at the sentences below.
a. Jane lost her car key last week (veja que ela sabe quando perdeu a
chave).
b. Tom is looking for his car key. He can’t find it.
He has lost his car key (ele a perdeu, mas não sabe precisar quando e ainda não
pôde encontrá-la).
No caso de Jane, usamos o Past Simple para explicar o fato, uma ação terminada, e temos um
tempo definido. Já no caso de Tom, não sabemos quando ocorreu, por isso usamos o Present Perfect,
que estudaremos a partir de agora.
A estrutura do Present Perfect consiste em juntar o verbo to have no presente (have / has) +
verbo principal no particípio. Lembrando que o particípio em português é indicado pela terminação
-ado(a), -ido. Ex: estudado, trabalhado, partido, comido. A função desse tempo verbal é:
• falar sobre algo que aconteceu num tempo não especificado no passado e que ainda tem
algum efeito no tempo presente:
- Tom has lost his car key.
• falar sobre o resultado presente de uma ação no passado:
-Why can’t Tom go to the party?
- Because he has lost his car key.
• d
ar
u
m
a
in
formação nova geralmente relacionada ao presente:
- I have lost my job. (E agora não tenho emprego.)
- Jane has found her car key. (Ela está com a chave agora.)
• falar de algo que começou no passado e continua por um período de tempo até o presente:
- Tom and his family have lived in the same house for 15 years. (Eles se mudaram 15 anos atrás e
permanecem lá até os dias de hoje.)
- She has worked for the same company since 1998.
- My brothers have played with the same band for 10 years.
Lembre-se desta formula:
No tempo verbal present perfect o verbo auxiliar é o verbo have / has. Isso quer dizer que, ao
invés de usar doesn’t ou don’t para a forma negativa, vamos usar haven’t / hasn’t, assim como para
fazer perguntas. Veja:
Present Perfect = have/has + past participle of the main verb
- Have you lived here for a long time?
- No, I haven’t. I have lived here for only three months.
- Yes, I have. I have lived here since I was born.
• Lembre-se de que usamos have para os pronomes pessoais I / you / we / they; e has para os
pronomes he / she / it.
Já o particípio passado tem formas variadas. Se os verbos são regulares, a terminação é a
mesma do Past simple (ou seja, acrescenta-se –ed aos verbos – veja as regras na aula 11); caso os
verbos sejam irregulares, devemos consultar uma lista de verbos. Observe os exemplos:
- The police have arrested two robbers of the bank.
- Have you seen that new Leonardo DiCaprio film?
- They haven’t found a new job yet.
Importante: A diferença entre o Past Simple e o Present Perfect é que no past simple temos
ações terminadas e o uso do auxiliar did, enquanto no present perfect falamos de ações que ainda têm
efeito no presente e usamos have ou has como auxiliares. Além disso, o tempo quando a ação
aconteceu não é importante no present perfect; já no past simple usamos: yesterday, last week, etc.
para demarcar quando a coisa aconteceu.
Utilizados principalmente no Past simple e no Present perfect, aqui temos uma lista de verbos
irregulares no presente, passado e particípio para que você estude. Os demais verbos provavelmente
serão regulares – terminam em – (i)ed. Veja:
Infinitive Past Simple Past Participle
be was, were been
become became become
begin began begun
break broke broken
bring brought brought
build built built
buy bought bought
choose chose chosen
come came come
cut cut cut
do did done
drink drank drunk
[m2] Comentário: Aqui não
seria “has”? Não, mesmo caso de
family. My family are very glad to
meet you.
drive drove driven
eat ate eaten
fall fell fallen
feel felt felt
fight fought fought
find found found
forget forgot forgotten
get got got
give gave given
go went gone
have had had
hear heard heard
keep kept kept
know knew known
leave left left
lose lost lost
make made made
mean meant meant
meet met met
pay paid paid
put put put
read read /red/ read /red/
Infinitive Past Simple Past Participle
ride rode ridden
run ran run
say said said
see saw seen
sell sold sold
show showed shown
sleep slept slept
speak spoke spoken
spend spent spent
swim swam swum
take took taken
teach taught taught
think thought thought
understand understood understood
wake woke waken
wear wore worn
win won won
write wrote written
Practice
1) Read the situations and complete the sentences. Choose one of the following verbs and
put the past participles given.
Example: Mike was looking for his wallet. He has found his wallet.__________
a) Linda has problems with her car. It_________________________________ .
b) My office has new computers. My boss_____________________________ them recently.
c) This is Tom’s first time in Europe. He has never _____________________ there before.
d) Louise loves shrimp. She has just_________________________________ some in a restaurant.
e) They are having a big party now. They_____________________________ a lot of friends.
2) Choose, circle and write the correct words or phrases.
a) Peter __________________ a meeting yesterday. (has/ has had/ had)
b)They _______________ the car. It looks new again. (have cleaned/ cleaned/has cleaned)
c) Last year we _________________ to Italy. (went/ goed/ has gone)
d) John and Peggy ________________ the project. Now they can have a break.
(has finished/ have finished/ finished)
e) They _______________ each other at a party two weeks ago. (have met/meeted/ met)
f) I’m sorry but I ________________ to bring the documents for you this morning. (forgot/forget/
have forgotten)
Vocabulary
Have you ever…?
Essa pergunta é muito usada para introduzir conversas e para questionar sobre experiências
de vida até o presente momento. Uma vez que se obtém a resposta positiva, é possível dar
Be Break Buy Eat Find Meet
(Been) (Broken) (Bought) (Eaten) (Found) (Met)
continuidade ao assunto usando o passado simples (com o auxiliar did), pois vai ser mencionado o
tempo definido logo em seguida.
- Have you ever been to London?
-Yes, I have.
- When did you go there?
- I went there two years ago.
-I have never eaten Indian food.
-Really? Have you ever eaten Brazilian food?
-Oh, yes, I have.
-Where did you eat it?
- I ate it last Christmas.
• Observe que, quando usamos o advérbio never, o verbo auxiliar (have ou has) é mantido na
forma positiva uma vez que never é um advérbio de negação.
Practice
1) Make questions about life experiences and then ask a partner. Look for the past
participles you need in a list of irregular verbs. Remember the regular verbs end in –ed.
Example: (ever/ ride/horse) Have you ever ridden a horse?______________________
a) (ever/ be/to California) ________________________________________________
b) (ever/run/ a marathon) ________________________________________________
c) (ever/ speak/ to a famous person) ________________________________________
d) (always/live/ in this town)______________________________________________
e) (most beautiful place/ ever/ visit) What____________________________________
2) Make questions according to the answers with: Have you/ they ever..., Has she/ he
ever...?
a)____________________________________Yes, I've been to Paris twice.
b) ____________________________________No ,they have never studied French.
c) ____________________________________Yes, I've visited the Art Museum many times.
d)____________________________________Yes, Paula has tried sushi once or twice.
e) ____________________________________No, she has never been to New York.
f) ____________________________________Yes, my parents have come to Los Angeles three
times.
Already, just and yet
Leia as frases abaixo:
- My colleagues have already understood the new rules in the office.
- They have already done what you asked them to.
• Already (“já” em português) é usado em frases afirmativas entre o auxiliar e o verbo
principal.
- He has just arrived home.
- I have just finished my homework.
• Usamos just com o Present Perfect em frases afirmativas entre o verbo auxiliar e o verbo
principal com a função de falar sobre atividades completadas ou acontecidas recentemente.
- Have you finished the report yet?
- I haven’t been to the supermarket yet.
• A palavra “yet” é usada sempre ao final de frases interrogativas e negativas, sendo que “yet”
usado na interrogativa tem o significado de “já”; na forma negativa “yet” significa “ainda”
em português.
3) Complete the sentences in column ‘B’. Use the verbs in brackets + just, already, yet.
Example: Would you like something to do? No, thanks. I’ve just finished a report now. (just/ finish)
b) Do you know where my secretary is? Yes, I __________________________her. (just/ see)
c) What time are you leaving home? I ________________________________. (already/leave)
d) What is the news today? I don’t know. I_____________________.
(not/watch TV/yet)
e) Are your relatives with you? Yes, they__________________________. (just/arrive)
Gone (to) and been (to)
Veja a diferença entre os verbos been e gone (verbos to be e to go, respectivamente) no
present perfect:
- Tim is travelling on business. He has gone to Ireland. (Ele está lá agora ou a caminho.)
- My boss is in Brazil again. He has been to Switzerland. (Ele já esteve lá, mas retornou.)
Time expressions + Present Perfect / Past Simple
Usamos o Present Perfect Simple com today, this morning, this evening, etc. quando estes
períodos de tempo ainda não terminaram no momento da fala. Assim:
- I’ve begun a new project this week.
- Have you had enough time for yourself this year?
- We haven’t called him today.
- It hasn’t rained a lot this summer.
For, since, ago
• We use for + a period of time. Ex.: Minutes, hours, days, weeks, years, a long/short time, etc.
I have been ill for five days.
I have worked overtime for hours.
• We use since + a word that expresses a definite point in time. Ex.: Friday, last March, I was a
child, etc.
He has been in London since Monday.
He has been living in London since 2003.
• We use ago to say before now or duration + ago. Ago is generally used with the Past simple,
I started my therapy two years ago. (= two years before now)
‘When did he go out?’ ‘Ten minutes ago.’ (= ten minutes before now)
4) Complete with since, ago or for.
a) We studied French ______________ 10 years.
b) They have worked here _______________ they were at college.
c) We have known each other ______________ a long time.
d) We started this book 5 months ________________.
e) Thy have tried to win the lottery ______________ years.
f) Leslie has gone to Ohio on business _______________ 1982.
g) Melissa arrived at the office an hour ______________.
h) Two days _____________ we decided to change our strategy.
Writing
1) Answer the questions below:
a. Where have you lived? __________________________________________________
b. How long have you lived there? ___________________________________________
c. Have you ever been a volunteer? __________________________________________
d. Have you ever traveled abroad? ___________________________________________
e. Where have you worked? ________________________________________________
f. How long have you worked there? _________________________________________
2) Write a small paragraph talking about your general experience using the answers from
the previous exercise:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Pronunciation
Vamos estudar a pronúncia de mais alguns sons das consoantes? Let’s start!?!
3) Circle the word with the consonant sound that doesn’t rhyme.
/��������/ child fish question watch
/&&&&/* televi����ion please revision usually
/����&&&&/ just college get January
/&&&&/* Som não muito comum.
• Use a dictionary (http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074). Check with your tutor and
practice the pronunciation at www.say.expressivo.com.
Summary
Na aula de hoje você conheceu um novo tempo verbal, parecido com o Past Simple, que
você já viu nas aulas 11 e 12, porém com suas peculiaridades: o Present Perfect. Você aprendeu a
diferenciar esses dois tempos verbais e as expressões que são comumente utilizadas com cada um
deles. Agora que você já sabe tudo isso, é hora de praticar, falar, em inglês, de suas experiências e
atividades exercidas até o momento. Hoje estudamos também os últimos sons de consoantes que
você ainda não conhecia. Pratique, pesquise e tire suas dúvidas sobre o que não entendeu. A próxima
aula será uma revisão de toda a gramática, vocabulário e pronúncia que vimos até hoje! Faça uma
revisão das aulas da segunda unidade de nosso livro e prepare-se para perguntar o que não está claro
para você. Bons estudos!
See you next class!
Good bye!!!
Ana Célia Lima
Viviane Gomes Pontes
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 2 – Estruturas Morfo-léxico-sintáticas
English Basic Level
• 20th Lesson
Revision
Aim
Revisar os principais tópicos de gramática, vocabulário e pronúncia estudados e que
compreendem as estruturas morfo-léxico-sintáticas da língua inglesa.
Introduction
Hello! Good morning! Good afternoon! Good evening!
Hoje terminamos mais uma etapa de nossas aulas. Até aqui estudamos gramática, vocabulário
e pronúncia, que fazem parte do conhecimento básico que você deve ter para ler e se comunicar em
inglês, o que, segundo nossa ementa, você vai fazer a partir das próximas aulas. Aproveite para tirar
todas as suas dúvidas!
Time to revise!!! Let’s go?
Grammar
Temos três verbos muito importantes na língua inglesa, os verbos auxiliares To Be, To Do e
To Have, cada um deles tem sua importância para determinados tempos verbais. Relembre:
To Be = AM (NOT), IS(N’T), ARE(N’T) (present) [ser, estar]
WAS(N’T), WERE(N’T) (past)
• O verbo to be é usado como auxiliar principalmente no present continuous (am / is / are +
verb + -ing) – aula 14. Ex.: I’m studying. He isn’t reading.Are we working? etc.
• É usado também para fazer definições e falar das horas – aulas 3, 4, 5, 6 e 7. She’s a waiter.
Are they domestic animals? It’s nine o’clock.
• Usamos THERE + IS(N’T) / ARE(N’T, que tem o significado de haver, existir – no presente.
* Não usamos there am. No passado, essa estrutura se transforma em THERE + WAS(N’T) /
WERE(N’T) com a mesma função – aula 13. Ex.: There is a new film at the cinema. Was
there a microwave in your kitchen?
• Com a estrutura GOING TO também usamos o verbo to be como auxiliar – aula 16. Assim:
She is going to move house next week. They aren’t going to buy a new car.
To Do = DO(N’T), DOES(N’T) (present)
DID(N’T) (past)
• O verbo to do é usado como auxiliar principalmente no present simple nas formas negativa e
interrogativa, acompanhado de verbos principais no infinitivo (I / you / we / they + do / don’t
– he / she / it + does / doesn’t) – aulas 5 e 7. Ex.: She doesn’t like fast food. Do you live near
the office? etc.
• DID(N’T) são usados na forma passada seguidos de verbos no infinitivo. Só usamos os
verbos no passado na forma afirmativa – aulas 11, 12 e 19. Ex.: Did you go on holiday last
year? She didn’t like his new apartment. You waited for 12 hours before travelling. He won a
marathon last Sunday. Lembre-se de que, quando usamos auxiliaries, no caso did e didn’t, os
verbos voltam para o infinitivo no presente.
To Have = HAVE(N’T), HAS(N’T) (present perfect)
• O verbo to have é usado como auxiliar no present perfect nas formas negativa e interrogativa
acompanhado de verbos principais no particípio deles [I / you / we / they + have(n’t) – he /
she / it + has(n’t)] – aulas 19. Ex.: We haven’t been to Canada. Has your boss gone to the
bank yet? etc.
Agora que já revisamos as estruturas dos tempos verbais estudados, vamos rever as funções
deles?
• Present simple = expressa rotina, hábitos e generalizações ou fatos verdadeiros sobre algo;
• present continuous = expressa ações acontecendo no momento ou em um futuro próximo;
• there to be = fala do que há, existe ou do que houve, existia em um determinado local;
• going to = expressa planos ou previsões sobre o futuro;
• past simple = fala de ações terminadas no passado;
• present perfect = refere-se a experiências de vida até o momento e ações iniciadas no
passado, mas que ainda têm efeito no tempo presente.
Pronouns & Adjectives
Personal pronouns Object pronouns Possessive adjectives Possessive pronouns
I Me My Mine
You You Your Yours
He Him His His
She Her Her Hers
It It Its Its
We Us Our Ours
They Them Their Theirs
• Personal pronouns = também chamados de subject pronouns porque funcionam como o
sujeito das frases. Temos para singular: I (1ª pessoa) /you (2ª pessoa) /he /she /it (3ª pessoa); e
plural: we (1ª pessoa)/ you (2ª pessoa)/ they (3ª pessoa) – aula 3. Ex.: Michael is a lawyer. He
is a successful businessman.
• Object pronouns = são usados para se referir ao sujeito, ou aos pronomes do sujeito – aula
10. Ex.: I don’t like him. Listen to me!
• Possessive adjectives = são os adjetivos de posse, sempre acompanhados de um substantivo –
aula 4. Ex.: My job. Our car. Its name.
• Possessive pronouns = esses pronomes substituem geralmente expressões com adjetivos
possessivos e ocorrem na maioria das vezes ao final das expressões. Ex.: -Is that your coat?
-No, it’s hers. Mine is black.
*Para falar da posse de objetos ou parentesco, podemos usar ‘s. Ex.: They’re Silvia’s daughters. That
is Robert’s new motorbike.
Articles , Demonstrative Pronouns & Prepositions of time
• Definite article = the é usado tanto para o singular quanto para o plural para falar de algo que já foi mencionado antes ou que é conhecido – aula 4. Ex.: The door is open (você sabe a qual porta se refere).
• Indefinite article = a / an são usados somente no singular, para se referir a um objeto ou pessoa qualquer, que não foi mencionado ou especificado – aulas 4 e 6. Ex.: He is an engineer. It’s a very big house.
• This / these Indicam pessoa ou coisa que está próxima de quem fala, no singular e no plural, respectivamente – aula 4. Ex.: This is a book. These are some grammar topics.
• That / those Serve para mostrar uma pessoa ou coisa que está longe de quem fala, no singular e no plural, respectivamente – aula 4. Ex.: That is Mr. Johnson’s wife.Those are the boys who work in the sales department.
• IN para períodos longos de tempo (partes do dia, meses, estações do ano e anos) – aula 8. Ex,:
in March, in 1994, in the summer, etc. Never say in the night, but say at night.
• ON para períodos de tempo específicos (dias da semana e datas) – aula 8. Ex.: on September
11th, on the 4th of July, on Christmas Day (but at Christmas).
• AT para horas e algumas expressões de tempo – aula 8. Ex.: at 7 o’clock, at midday - at
bedtime e também: at the moment, at the same time, at weekends, etc.
Can & Can’t – aula 9
Can e can’t são verbos modais; eles não se flexionam e podem ser usados para formar frases
negativas e interrogativas assim como os auxiliares. A diferença entre eles é que “can” expressa,
possibilidade, permissão ou habilidade. Ex.: I can swim very well. Can you open the window, please?
I can’t help you, sorry.
Like & Would Like
Quando usamos os verbos like, love, don’t like e hate para falar de nossos gostos e
preferências, os verbos que vêm na sequência terminam em gerúndio (–ing) – aula 9. Ex.: I like
surfing the internet. Lisa hates doing housework. They don’t like working at weekends. We love
eating out at restaurants.
Já a expressão would like é usada para falar de desejos para o futuro, após usarmos would
like, o verbo que vem em seguida vem no infinitivo com “ to” – aulas 9 e 18. Ex.: He would like to be
a good dentist. They would like to live in a bigger apartment.
Some / Any / (How) much / (How) many – aula 15
• Some = frases afirmativas para falar de quantidades incertas ou para oferecer algo. Would you
like some water? I’d like to have some free time to travel.
• Any = frases negativas e interrogativas. Ex.: She doesn’t have any free time. Is there any
cheese in the fridge?
• (How) much = usado com substantivos incontáveis. Ex.: How much noise is there in your
city? Not much. I don’t have much money at the bank.
• (How) many = usado com substantivos contáveis. Ex.: How many children do they have?
There are many cars in the streets nowadays.
Adjectives & Adverbs
A diferença entre adjetivos e advérbios é que adjetivos qualificam substantivos e os advérbios
qualificam ações, ou têm funções de expressar dúvida, negação, frequência, etc.
• Adjectives = aparecem sempre antes dos substantivos e não têm plural – aula 7. Ex.: new
office, tall buildings, young child. Os adjetivos têm grau comparativo e superlativo:
• Comparative adjectives = para fazer comparações entre um ou mais elementos, usamos os
adjetivos na forma comparativa + “than” [do que]– aula 17. Big = bigger (no adjetivo de
uma sílaba que termina em consoante + vogal + consoante – a última letra é repetida e
acrescenta-se –er); small = smaller (acrescenta-se–er); easy = easier (adjetivos terminados
em –y precedidos de consoante, tiramos o –y e acrescentamos –ier); interesting = more
interesting (adjetivos de duas ou mais sílabas usamos more / less + adjetivo). Adjetivos que
não seguem essas regras: bad = worse, good = better, far = farther.
• Superlative adjectives = para comparar um elemento com um grupo de elementos, usamos
“ the” [o / a / os / as]+ os adjetivos na forma superlativa – aula 17. Fat = fattest (adjetivo de
uma sílaba que termina em consoante + vogal + consoante – a última letra é repetida e
acrescenta-se –est); new = newest (acrescenta-se–est); preety = prettiest (adjetivos
terminados em –y precedidos de consoante, tiramos o –y e acrescentamos –iest); important =
the most important (adjetivos de duas ou mais sílabas usamos the most / least + adjetivo).
Adjetivos que não seguem essas regras: bad = worst, good = best, far = farthest.
• Adverbs = existem advérbios de modo (calmly, aggressively – acrescenta-se –ly ao adjetivo),
de tempo (yesterday, now, tomorrow), de frequência (always, never, often, sometimes), etc.
Eles têm função e qualificam ações, geralmente – aula 18. Advérbios irregulares: good =
well, hard = hard, fast = fast.
Vocabulary
1) Circle the word that is different.
Example:
Brazil China French The USA
a. Cooker Footballer Lawyer Teacher
b. Brother Father Mother Uncle
c. Angry Hungry Tall Tired
d. Always Often Sometimes Today
e. Been Bought Saw Wrote
f. Cooked Heard Studied Walked
g. Chair Desk Kitchen Sofa
h. Bank Drugstore Gas station Square
i. Beans Carrots Coffee Rice
j. Badly Hard Love Well
2) Write the next word:
Example: two, three, four____
a. Fifty, forty, ______________
b. Monday, Tuesday, ______________
c. Second, third, ______________
d. Tenth, twentieth, ______________
e. Morning, afternoon, ______________
f. Twice, three times, ______________
g. Second, minute, ______________
h. Autumn, winter, ______________
i. April, May, ______________
j. Last week, this week, ______________
3) Answer the questions:
Example: What’s the opposite of new? Old____
a. What’s the eighth month of the year? _______________________________________
b. Who’s your father’s brother? _____________________________________________
c. In which room do you have a sofa? ________________________________________
d. What’s the opposite of cheap? ____________________________________________
e. What’s the past tense of buy? _____________________________________________
f. Where can you buy tickets and book a holiday? ______________________________
g. What language do they speak in France? ____________________________________
h. Who is the person who cares for patients in a hospital? _________________________
i. What’s the opposite of hate? ______________________________________________
j. What’s the synonym of shy? ______________________________________________
4) Complete the verbs.
Example: play__ football
a. G_________ married
b. H_________ lunch
c. G_________ shopping
d. D_________ homework
e. M_________ a noise
f. T_________ photos
g. T_________ on your mobile phone
h. G_________ someone a present
i. P_________ the guitar
j. W_________ for the plane
5) What can you see? Label the pictures.
_________________ _________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________ _________________
6) Complete the sentences with a preposition.
a. Giovani’s Italian. He’s __________ Napoli.
b. Brazilian men often talk _________ football.
c. My sister’s _________ college. She studies engineering.
d. How often do you listen _________ the radio?
e. What time did you wake _________ this morning?
f. Is there a TV _________ your dining room?
g. I don’t drink a lot _________ alcohol.
h. How long did you wait _________ the train?
i. Their office is next _________ my apartment.
j. Have you even been _________ London?
Pronunciation
Vamos agora rever a pronúncia dos sons das vogais e consoantes segundo o IPA.
Vowel Sounds
Vogais com som curto (short vowels)
Vogais com som longo (long vowels)
Ditongos (diphthongs)
/����/ = I t /����''''/ = me /����/ = man /����''''/ = car
/����/ = clock /����''''/ = tomorrow / / = book /����''''/ = you
// = children /((((''''/ = university /����/ = men /����/ = bus
/��������/ = name / / = home /��������/ = hi /���� / = about
/��������/ = boy /����/ = year /����/ = chair / / = tourist*
Consonant Sounds
Vozeadas (voiced consonants)
Desvozeadas (unvoiced consonants)
/����/ = plant /$$$$/ = bathroom /����/ = kitchen / / = glass
/����/ = fat /����/ = travel /����/ = tall /����/ = dinner
� �: � �:
� �: �:
(: � �
�� �� �
�� � �
� $ �
� � � �
� " � &
) � �� �&
� � � !
� % #
/����/ = chess /""""/ = busy /����/ = sugar /&&&&/ = television
/))))/ = bir thday /����/ = mother /��������/ = question /����&&&&/ = January
/����/ = like /����/ = rain /����/ = shower /!!!!/ = yesterday
/����/ = morning // = next /%%%%/ = meeting /####/ = healthy
1) Use a dictionary (http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074). Check with your tutor and
practice the pronunciation at www.say.expressivo.com.
2) Where’s the stress. Underline the stressed syllable in the words below:
a. American
b. Afternoon
c. Thirteen
d. Breakfast
e. July
f. Musician
g. Between
h. Bathroom
i. Tomorrow
j. Pronunciation
k. Sunglasses
l. Magazine
m. Chocolate
n. Umbrella
o. Receptionist
p. Grandmother
q. Dangerous
r. Museum
s. Supermarket
t. Newspaper
Summary
Hoje revisamos a maior parte dos tópicos que você viu até agora em termos de gramática,
vocabulário e pronúncia. Com isso, nosso objetivo é que, a partir desta aula, você já esteja pronto
para ler e se comunicar em inglês com mais facilidade. Mas é preciso ainda que você estude, pratique
e tire todas as suas dúvidas. A partir da próxima aula, vamos ler textos, diálogos e vídeos sobre
situações cotidianas para que você desenvolva suas habilidades de leitura e conversação.
See you soon!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Unidade 3 – Compreensão auditiva e leitura
para comunicação em língua inglesa
English Basic Level
• 21st Lesson
At the airport
Introduction
Hi there! How are things?
Na aula de hoje vamos abordar uma situação específica como meio de preparar você para
uma viagem de negócios. O nosso tema de hoje é: At the airport!
Enjoy it!
Vocabulary
AIR TRAVELING
travel agency - agência de viagem
flight reservation - reserva de voo
hotel reservation - reserva de hotel
visa - visto de entrada
air ticket - passagem aérea
airplane ticket - passagem aérea
flight ticket - passagem aérea
one-way ticket - passagem só de ida
round-trip ticket - passagem de ida e volta
airport - aeroporto
airline - companhia aérea
departure - partida
arrival - chegada
rest room - banheiro, toilete
airline counter - balcão da linha aérea
check in (a flight, a hotel) - despachar a
Aim
Entender diálogos, vídeos e textos que possam auxiliar em uma viagem de negócios, no
caso, em um aeroporto.
bagagem e receber o cartão de embarque;
registrar-se em um hotel
check out (hotel) - fechar as contas
baggage - bagagem
luggage - bagagem
suitcase - mala
briefcase - maleta de mão
hand baggage - bagagem de mão
carry-on bag - bagagem de mão
boarding pass - cartão de embarque
baggage ticket - ticket da bagagem
lost baggage - bagagem extraviada
gate - portão
Disembarkation Card - cartão de
desembarque, documento exigido por alguns
países e distribuído no avião
Arrival/Departure Record - documento de
registro de chegada e partida, semelhante ao
anterior e também normalmente distribuído no
avião.
Customs Declaration - documento de
declaração à alfândega
Accompanied Baggage Declaration -
documento de declaração à alfândega
semelhante ao anterior.
immigration control - contrôle de imigração
immigration officer - fiscal de imigração
baggage claim area - área de recebimento de
bagagem
conveyor - esteira transportadora da bagagem
customs - alfândega
go through customs - passar pela alfândega
customs officer - fiscal alfandegário, oficial
da receita federal
lockers (available at hotels, airports, train
stations and bus terminals) - armários
chaveados para guardar malas
temporariamente
airport limousine - microônibus que faz
transporte entre aeroporto e hotéis
shuttle bus - ônibus que circula entre
diferentes terminais nos grandes aeroportos
Fonte: http://www.sk.com.br/
Listening, Speaking & Watching
At the Airport
Before you travel with us through this unit, watch this video with some information about
flights and vocabulary we are going to use!
Enjoy this amazing video!
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lCKFGYFxg7A&feature=fvw
1) Read and complete the dialogue below between the C (check-in attendant) and P
(passenger). Use the words in the box below:
C: Next please. May I see your _______________, please?
P: Yes, of course. There you are.
C: Thank you. Fight ____________ to Houston.
P: Yep!
C: Alright. How many suitcases do you have?
P: I’ve got three suitcases and two carry-ons.
C: Did you ____________ them yourself, Mr. Smith?
P: Yes, I did. I packed them this morning.
C: And where did you leave your _____________ just after you packed them?
P: I left them in the hotel hallway.
C: Have you already checked if anybody opened your bags after you packed them?
P: Not yet, but I don’t think anybody touched them.
C: Are you sure? These are just the ______________ procedures, sir.
P: I still don’t understand why you have so many questions.
C: Just a few more questions.
P: Go ahead.
C: Are any of the articles on this list in your ________________?
P: Let me see. Firearms… fireworks… lighters… matches. No, no, no.
C: Good. Everything is all right. Could you put your suitcase on the scales please?
P: Yes, of course.
C: It’s six kilos ______________. That’ll cost US$10.95, sir.
P: Oh, wow. That’s expensive. Anyway, there you go.
Aisle Bags Flight Luggage MA307 Overweight
Pack Scheduled Security Suitcase Tickets
C: All right. One ______________ seat. Your seat number is 16D. The flight is
_________________ to depart on time. Here are your _______________ pass.
P: Thank you.
C: You’re welcome. Have a good __________________.
Reading Comprehension
1) Answer the questions:
a) How many suitcases did the passenger have?
______________________________________________________________________
b) How overweight was Mr. Smith’s suitcase?
______________________________________________________________________
c) Where did Mr. Smith have to put the suitcase?
______________________________________________________________________
d) What are the objects that Mr. Smith can’t take in the flight?
______________________________________________________________________
e) Does he have these objects in his luggage?
______________________________________________________________________
f) What do you call these objects in Portuguese?
______________________________________________________________________
Listening, Speaking & Oral Comprehension
Immigration and Customs
Do you know this place at the pictures? It’s called Customs
Customs is an authority or agency in a country responsible for collecting and safeguarding
customs duties and for controlling the flow of goods including animals, personal effects and
hazardous (dangerous) items in and out of a country.
Fonte: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Customs
Practice
1) Listen to a conversation in the Customs in the link: http://www.esl-
lab.com/customs/customrd1.htm and answer the questions at the website. Check with
your tutor and colleagues.
2) After you finish these questions, go back to the listening activity for this vocabulary
exercise and practice your speaking skills and/or use the Internet to find more
information about this topic.
a) Please be sure to collect your __________________, including any small electronic devices
and clothing, before you get off the plane.
( ) mail ( ) belongings ( ) luggage
b) Could you open your ______________? Our x-ray machine shows that you might have a
small knife and bottle inside . . . things you can't take on the plane.
( ) wallet ( ) pocket ( ) luggage
c) What is the _______________ of your visit to the US? Business or pleasure?
( ) design ( ) purpose ( ) meaning
d) Where will you be _____________ during your week-long vacation? In a hotel downtown?
You can find some great accommodations there.
( ) staying ( ) renting ( )shopping
e) I will _______________ several business meetings while in the US. We will be reviewing the
future plans of our companies.
( ) attend ( )discuss ( ) test
3) Listen to the conversation one more time and fill in the gaps.
Customs Officer: Next. Uh, your _______________, please.
Woman: Okay.
Customs Officer: Uh, what is the purpose of your _______________?
Woman: I'm here to _______________ a teaching convention for the first part of my trip, and then I
plan on touring the capital for a few days.
Customs Officer: And where will you be staying?
Woman: I'll be staying in a room at a hotel _______________ for the entire week.
Customs Officer: And uh, what do you have in your _______________?
Woman: Uh, well, just, just my _______________ belongings, um . . . clothes, a few books, and a
CD player.
Customs Officer: Okay. Uh, please open your bag.
Woman: Sure.
Customs Officer: Okay . . . Everything's fine. [Great]. Uh, by the way, is this your first visit to the
_______________?
Woman: Well, yes and no. Actually, I was born here when my _______________ were working in
the capital many years ago, but this is my first trip back _______________ then.
Customs Officer: Well, _______________ your trip.
Woman: Thanks.
4) Discussion. Ask your partner(s) the following questions. Remember to ask follow up wh-
questions, use your imagination!
a) Have you ever flown? Where did you go the first time? __________________________________
b) Do you like flying? Why / Why not? _________________________________________________
c) Have you ever flown business class? _________________________________________________
d) Do you think it's good value? _______________________________________________________
e) What is the best / worst airline you've flown? Why? _____________________________________
Vocabulary
1) Match the sentences to the answers in the 2 conversations. :
Checking In
(A = attendant, B = passenger)
1. A: Good morning. Can I have your ticket,
please?
2. A: Thank you. Would you like smoking
or non-smoking?
3. A: Would you like a window or an aisle
seat?
4. A: Do you have any baggage?
5. A: Here's your boarding pass. Have a
nice flight.
( ) B: An aisle seat, please.
( ) B: Here you are.
( ) B: Non-smoking, please.
( ) B: Thank you.
( ) B: Yes, this suitcase and this carry-on bag.
Passport Control
(A = attendant, B = passenger)
1. Good morning. Can I see your passport?
2. Thank you very much. Are you a tourist
or on business?
3. That's fine. Have a pleasant stay.
( ) B: I'm a tourist.
( ) B: Thank you.
( ) B: Here you are.
Fonte: http://esl.about.com/od/beginnerpronunciation/a/bd_airport.htm
2) Complete the sentences about the airport. The first letters are given.
a. A trip on an airplane is called a f_____________.
b. A flight within one country is called a d_____________ flight.
c. A flight between different countries is called an i_____________ flight.
d. The letters and numbers which identify an airplane making a specific flight are called a
f_____________ n_____________.
e. Ordering a seat to be held for you on the day you want to travel is called making a
r_____________.
f. A printed piece of paper which allows you to travel on an airplane is a t_____________.
g. The first thing to do at the airport is c_____________ i_____________, which means to
register as a passenger for a flight.
h. A document which identifies you as a citizen of a certain country and which allows you to
travel to other countries is called a p_____________.
i. A stamp in your passport which allows you to travel to another country is called a
v_____________.
j. A seat next to the window in an airplane is called a w_____________ s_____________.
k. A seat next to the passage between the rows of seats in an airplane is called an
a_____________ s_____________.
l. The suitcases and bags which contain your belongings are called b_____________.
m. A bag which you carry with you on the airplane is called a c_____________ bag.
n. A small ticket with printed numbers that identify your baggage is called a baggage
c_____________ c_____________.
o. A printed card which allows you to get on an airplane is called a b_____________
p_____________.
p. A door which leads from the airport building into an airplane is called a g_____________.
q. The area where you pick up your baggage after a flight is called b_____________
c_____________.
Fonte: http://a4esl.org/q/h/9901/nr-airport.html
Reading & Reading Comprehension
So you aren't really sure about what happens if you arrive late at the airport or if the weather keeps you from
flying. It's time to get to know some of the myths and confusion surrounding air travel.
Top myths of air travel
1. You will be compensated if your flight cancels - If it is a mechanical issue, crew is unavailable, or some
other reason where the airline is at fault, compensation is definitely a possibility! (…) the airline does not owe
you compensation - no hotel, meals, transportation, etc.. (...)
2. If you miss your flight you will be booked on the next one out - Not necessarily, and not necessarily for
free. It depends on why you missed your flight. (…) If you are connecting and your flight in was late, an
airline may have already protected you on the next flight (…). But if you just showed up late at the airport, the
airline is in no way obligated to put you on the next flight, or any flight without charging you a fee.
3. When a flight is cancelled because of something beyond an airline's control they will book you on the next
available flight. This does not mean the next flight out, but the next one that has space on it. (…) If space isn't
available on the next flight you can certainly request to standby and take your chances.
4. Flights hold for people who check in late - Not a chance, unless you own or run the airline. (…) So if you
check in late, get yourself to the gate!
5. If your flight cancels you will be booked on the next available flight regardless of airline - Not so if you are
on a low cost airline, and it is more difficult to get this to happen now that tickets are usually electronic.
6. If an airline goes bankrupt you will be protected on another airline, or be able to get your money back –
(…) You may or may not get a refund eventually from an airline that has stopped operating completely.(…)
you may be accommodated, most often on a space-available basis.
7. It's okay to bring lighters in your carry-on luggage - Say bye-bye to your Bic if you try this, although
airports in the US now generally permit lighters through airport security.
8. If you make a group booking, with your family, or a travel companion, you will be seated together – (…) If
you can book your seat numbers in advance then things will usually work out, but if not don't panic. The gate
agent will try and get those seats together and you can also ask the flight attendant to help you.
Fonte:Adaptado de www.about.com
1) Circle the words which are similar to Portuguese – cognates. Read the text again.
2) Check all the words you don’t know in a dictionary
(http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074) and practice the pronunciation at
www.say.expressivo.com.
Summary
Na aula de hoje vimos diálogos, vídeos e situações referentes ao tópico “At the airport”. Não
se preocupe se você não conhece um aeroporto ou nunca viajou de avião. Quando chegar o
momento, você estará preparado, uma vez que estudou e aprendeu nesta aula. Não se esqueça de
pesquisar, ver mais vídeos e diálogos. Abaixo deixo algumas sugestões de atividades para você fazer
em casa, como “extra practice”:
• http://www.oup.com/elt/global/products/headway/elementary/f_everydayenglish/hwy_elem_
dialogue06/
Goodbye!
Ana Célia Lima
Viviane Gomes Pontes
REFERÊNCIAS
About.com. Air travel – Top 10 myths about Air travel and Airports. Online. Disponível em:
http://airtravel.about.com/od/travelindustrynews/a/airmyth.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Esl.about.com. Beginner dialogues – At the airport. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/od/beginnerpronunciation/a/bd_airport.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Esl-lab.com. Immigrations and customs. Online. Disponível em: http://www.esl-
lab.com/customs/immigrationcustoms-mcquiz.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
Sk.com.br. Vocabulary for travelling. Online. Disponível em: http://www.sk.com.br/sk-travl.html.
Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
• Extra video
Oxford University Press Website. Everyday English – At the airport. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.oup.com/elt/global/products/headway/elementary/f_everydayenglish/hwy_elem_dialogu
e06/. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Unidade 3 – Compreensão auditiva e leitura
para compreensão e comunicação em língua inglesa
English Basic Level
• 22nd Lesson
On a plane
Introduction
Hello! How are you?
A aula de hoje tem como tema as viagens de avião. O que acontece após o embarque? Você
vai descobrir nesta aula, porque estaremos On a plane!
Have a nice class!
Reading & Reading Comprehension
• Text I
Interview with a Business Traveller
Interviewer: Good morning Sir. I'd like to ask you a few questions if I may.
Jack: Well, I'm waiting to catch my flight so I guess I can answer a few questions.
Interviewer: Thank you, Sir. First of all, how often do you travel?
Jack: I travel about twice a month.
Interviewer: Where are you flying to on this trip?
Jack: I'm flying to Austin, Texas.
Interviewer: … and where did you fly on your last trip?
Jack: I flew to Portland, Oregon. I've already been there three times!
Aim
Entender novo vocabulário em textos e diálogos sobre viagens de avião ou situações
que ocorrem durante uma viagem, seja ela doméstica ou internacional.
Interviewer: Really! Do you enjoy travelling for business?
Jack: Yes, although I prefer staying in the office.
Interviewer: What do you like most about travelling?
Jack: I like visiting new cities and trying out new food.
Interviewer: Is there anywhere you would like to visit that you haven't visited yet?
Jack: Yes, I'd like to go to Hawaii! I love going to the beach!
Interviewer: Thank you very much for your time today.
Jack: You're welcome. My pleasure.
1) Check your understanding with this multiple choice comprehension quiz, tick ( ���� )
the correct answer:
a. Jack is waiting to catch a flight.
( ) True ( ) False ( ) Doesn't say
b. Jack travels twice a month.
( ) True ( ) False ( ) Doesn't say
c. Jack especially likes going to Portland.
( ) True ( ) False ( ) Doesn't say
d. Jack is flying to Oregon.
( ) True ( ) False ( ) Doesn't say
e. Jack flew to Portland for his last trip.
( ) True ( ) False ( ) Doesn't say
f. Jack has already been to Portland four
times.
( ) True ( ) False ( ) Doesn't say
g. Jack likes eating in good restaurants.
( ) True ( ) False ( ) Doesn't say
h. Jack would like to visit Hawaii.
( ) True ( ) False ( ) Doesn't say
i. Jack doesn't enjoy travelling for business.
( ) True ( ) False ( ) Doesn't say
j. Jack likes visiting new cities and meeting
new people.
( ) True ( ) False ( ) Doesn't say
Fonte: http://esl.about.com/od/beginningreadingskills/a/d_biztravel.htm
• Text II
What to Wear and Carry on a Plane Trip
Flying in Style and Comfort
By Susan Breslow Sardone, About.com Guide
Dress comfortably, but in style.
(…) With all of the checkpoints people must go through to get from the terminal to the plane to their
destination — check-in, security, passport control, customs, immigration — it’s smart to dress
comfortably and in a way that won’t cause a delay for you or your fellow plane passengers. (…)
The following tips can help you decide how to dress and otherwise prepare for your next plane trip:
Dress in Layers (…)
S-t-r-e-t-c-h (…)
Avoid Heavy Metal (…)
Wear Slip-On Shoes (…)
Manage Your Electronics (…)
Minimize Liquids (…)
Fonte: http://honeymoons.about.com/od/flying/a/whattowear.htm
1) Circle the words which are similar to Portuguese – cognates. Read the text again.
2) Check all the words you don’t know in a dictionary
(http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074) and practice the pronunciation at
www.say.expressivo.com.
3) Write a paragraph about the reasons why the author gives this tips for what to wear
and carry on a plane travel.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Listening, Reading & Speaking
1) Read along with the audio recording. The listening track is available at:
http://www.dailyesl.com/plane-tickets.htm.
When I go on vacation, I usually travel by plane. In the past, I used to book a flight with a
travel agency, but now, I tend to search online for good deals on plane tickets. Finding the best
price on plane tickets is probably the most important consideration, but the departure time, the
number of layovers, and the length of flight are also important factors. Making plane reservations
online is pretty easy to do, but don't forget that you still have to pay certain fees and taxes that go
along with the price of the ticket. Finally, keep in mind that you might have to pay a cancellation fee
if you decide to change your flight plans or cancel your flight.
2) Answer the question: What are the advantages and disadvantages of reserving plane
tickets online verses working with a travel agent?
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
3) What are the most important points you look for when choosing an airline for your next
flight? Rank the following points from the most (1) to least important (7): price,
destination, length of flight, on-time record, meals, comfort and seating, and customer
service.
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨
On a plane
1) Listen to the conversation at http://www.esl-lab.com/plane1/plnscr1.htm by pressing the
“Play Audio” button .
2) Read and review the Vocabulary and the sample sentences.
Captain: Hello everyone, this is the captain speaking, and I want to welcome you to Flight 18 bound
for Seattle. Our flight time today is 2 hours and 14 minutes, and we will be flying at an average
altitude of 29,000 feet. The local time in Seattle is a quarter to twelve (11:45), and the current
weather is sunny, but there is a chance of rain later in the day. We will be arriving at Gate 13, and we
will be announcing connecting flights on our approach to the Seattle airport.
On behalf of Sky Airlines and the crew, I want to wish you an enjoyable stay in the Seattle area or at
your final destination. Sit back and enjoy the flight.
• Key Vocabulary
bound (adjective): going to or heading for
- The plane is bound for London with stops in Atlanta and New York City.
feet (noun): 12 inches or 0.3 meters
- The flight attendant was only few feet away when I got her attention.
announce (verb): give information
- We need to wait at the gate until they announce our flight.
connecting flight (noun): when you arrive at the airport, your next plane is there to get on so you can continue
your trip
- We didn't arrive in time to catch our connecting flight.
crew (noun): all of the people who work together on a ship, train, or plane
- The plane's crew were very friendly and helpful.
destination (noun): the place you are going to
- What is your final destination on this trip?
altitude (noun): height
- This plane flies at an altitude of 31,000 feet..
approach (noun, also a verb): nearing or coming to - The plane is approaching the airport.
- It started to snow very heavily as the airplane started its approach to the airport.
Vocabulary
1) Complete the sentences using the words from the box below. Check in a dictionary.
At the airport : Attention please, British Airways announce the _____________________________
of flight BA 362 to London Heathrow. Would passengers to London go to
_____________________________ number 7 for immediate _____________________________ ?
Please _____________________________ embarkation cards.
On the plane: Good morning ladies and gentlemen. On behalf of Captain Andrew and his
_____________________________ , welcome on board this British Airways Boeing 737. I
apologize for the _____________________________ , but we will be
_____________________________ very shortly. Some information about the flight:
Our flight _____________________________ to London will be two hours and twenty-five minutes.
We will be flying at the _____________________________ of 30,000 feet, and our
_____________________________ will be 500 miles per hour. We hope you have a pleasant flight.
The flight attendant: In a moment we will be _____________________________ at London
Heathrow where the weather is fine and sunny. Please make sure that your seatbelt is
_____________________________ , your seat is in the _____________________________ position
and your table is _____________________________ away.
CREW DELAY DEPARTURE EMBARKATION GATE HAND OUT FASTENED UPRIGHT FOLDED TAKING OFF TIME HEIGHT SPEED LANDING
Fonte: http://www.tolearnenglish.com/exercises/exercise-english-2/exercise-english-17029.php
2) Fill in the sentences using the verbs in the box:
a. We____________________ (now, fly) at an altitude of 7500 metres.
b. You____________________ (buy) newspapers at the newsstand.
c. The passengers____________________ (board) the plane at the moment.
d. The steward can't bring you a newspaper: he____________________ (serve) lunch.
e. Passengers usually____________________ (wait) for their flight in the departure lounge.
f. The plane____________________ off (take) an hour late.
3) Now, complete the sentences below with the best answer:
1. The ___________ will be serving food and beverages after the plane reaches its cruising altitude.
A. flight attendants B. pilots C. security officers
2. After the plane lands, you can pick up your luggage at the ______________.
A. boarding area B. baggage claim area C. overhead compartment
3. If the cabin loses pressure during flight, you should put on your _____________ so you can
breathe comfortably.
A. seat belt B. life jacket C. oxygen mask
Quiz – On a Plane
A person who serves passengers on an airplane is a f_____________ a_____________.
The passage between the rows of seats is called an a_____________.
are boarding are now flying buy took is serving wait
A s_____________ b_____________ is a strap worn as a belt to prevent you from being thrown out
of your seat.
An a_____________ is a small bar next to the seat which is used to support your arms while you are
seated.
A c_____________ b_____________ is a button on the armrest which is pushed when you want to
call a flight attendant.
Another button on the armrest is for the small light above your seat. This light is called a
r_____________ l_____________.
The o_____________ b_____________ are small compartments used for storing baggage above the
seats.
A w_____________ s_____________ is a flat panel used to prevent light from entering the window.
The pilot may say, "Please prepare for t_____________ o_____________."; this means that the
airplane will soon leave the ground and rise into the sky.
Small rooms on the airplane which have toilets and sinks are called _____________.
If there is a v_____________ sign on the door, the lavatory is empty.
If there is an o_____________ sign on the door, someone is in the lavatory
A form on which you provide information about the contents of your baggage is a c_____________
d_____________ form.
A form on which you write your name, address, and travel plans in a foreign country is an
i_____________ f_____________.
L_____________ is when the airplane goes down and reaches the ground again after a flight.
• Check your answers with a colleague or with your tutor.
Fonte: http://a4esl.org/q/h/9901/nr-airplane.html
Summary
Na aula de hoje falamos de aviões, tripulação, embarque e desembarque, situações que
ocorrem em uma viagem de avião, de modo geral. Espero que você se prepare através desse novo
vocabulário, faça os exercícios propostos e busque sempre mais. Pesquise na internet vídeos e sites
que sejam de seu interesse sobre o assunto. Como “extra practice” hoje, deixo mais dois links com
um quiz sobre aviões da BBC e um exercício no qual uma aeromoça fala sobre seu trabalho. Bons
estudos!
• http://www.bbc.co.uk/apps/ifl/worldservice/quiznet/quizengine?ContentType=text/html;quiz
=1134_planes
• http://www.elllo.org/yeartwo/feb21st/job/job.htm
See you!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
About.com. Flying – What to wear. Online. Disponível em:
http://honeymoons.about.com/od/flying/a/whattowear.htm. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
Activities4ESLStudents.org. On an Airplane. Online. Disponível em: http://a4esl.org/q/h/9901/nr-
airplane.html. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
DailyESL.com. Travel – Making plane reservations. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.dailyesl.com/plane-tickets.htm.. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
Dictionary Reference.com. Online. Disponível em: http://dictionary.reference.com/?o=100074.
Acesso em: 15 ago. 2010.
Esl.about.com. Beginner reading skills – A business travel. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/od/beginningreadingskills/a/d_biztravel.htm. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
Esl-lab.com. Plane – Travel on Sky Airlines. Online. Disponível em: http://www.esl-
lab.com/plane1/plnscr1.htm. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
Say.expressivo.com. Listen online. Online. Disponível em: http://say.expressivo.com/. Acesso em:
23 out. 2010.
ToLearnEnglish.com. Exercise – On the plane. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.tolearnenglish.com/exercises/exercise-english-2/exercise-english-17029.php. Acesso em:
31 dez. 2010.
• Extra videos
BBC.co.uk. Quiz – Planes. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/apps/ifl/worldservice/quiznet/quizengine?ContentType=text/html;quiz=1134_
planes. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
ELLLO.org . Job – Katrina talks about her job. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.elllo.org/yeartwo/feb21st/job/job.htm. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
Unidade 3 – Compreensão auditiva e leitura
para comunicação em língua inglesa
English Basic Level
• 23rd Lesson
At the hotel
Introduction
Hey! How are you?
O tema de nossa aula hoje é: At a hotel! Você vai aprender vocabulário referente a esse tema,
além de textos, vídeos e diálogos.
Are you ready?!
Vocabulary
Staying in a Hotel
daily rate - diária
porter - carregador de bagagem, porteiro
chambermaid - camareira
tip - gorgeta
tipping - dar gorgeta
lobby - saguão de entrada
Aim
Conhecer estruturas frasais e vocabulário sobre hotéis, estadia, staff do hotel etc., com o
intuito de preparar você para suas viagens de negócio como futuro businessman.
front desk - recepção
voucher - comprovante de reserva e pagamento da estadia
guest - hóspede
single room - quarto de solteiro
double room - quarto de casal
credit card - cartão de crédito
safe-deposit box - cofre
extra charge - custo adicional
key - chave
key card - chave de cartão
local call - chamada telefônica local
long-distance call - chamada longa-distância
international phone call - ligação internacional
station-to-station - ligação telefônica normal
person-to-person - ligação um pouco mais cara mas que se paga apenas no caso de se conseguir contato com
a pessoa desejada
collect call - ligação a cobrar
room service - serviço de quarto
minibar - frigobar
vending machine - máquinas de vender bebidas, etc.
swimming pool - piscina
city tour - passeio turístico pela cidade
city map - mapa da cidade
mall - shopping, centro comercial
youth hostel - albergue da juventude (excelentes na Europa)
tourist office - departamento de atendimento ao turista
1) Before you are our guest in this unit, learn some vocabulary below and watch this video:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wyqfYJX23lg&feature=related
Types of Accommodations
bed and breakfast
guesthouse
hotel
inn
resort
youth hostel
2) Try to find photos of this kind of accommodation on the Internet. If you don’t
understand, consult a dictionary or ask your tutor.
3) If you're traveling on a budget (when you can’t spend a lot of money) and you want to
meet other young people like you, you can consider staying at a _______________.
a) ( ) youth hostel
b) ( ) hotel
c) ( ) resort
Amenities
cable TV
check in / check out
hot tub
indoor / outdoor heated pool
kitchen / kitchenette
microwave
queen-size bed / king-size
bed
restaurant
room rates
sitting area
4) What are the most important amenities for you? Rank from the most important (1) to
the least important ( 11).
Hotel expressions
book a hotel
call the front desk
cancel a reservation
make a reservation
order room service
call the belboy / bellhop
5) Do you always ask the bellboy for some help? What services do you usually ask in a
hotel?
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Practice
1) Match the columns to make a dialogue between a receptionist and a guest. After you
finish, use some of the phrases to have a conversation with a partner.
Check in
Guest Receptionist
1) Good morning. I’d like to check in. a) ( ) Pardon me. Can you spell your
last name, please?
2) My reservation is under James Novarsik. b) ( ) I’ll call the bellhop, sir. He’ll
be here in a minute.
3) It’s N.OV.A.R.S.I.K.. c) ( ) Do you have a reservation?
4) Try my company. It’s kisravon Computers. d) ( )Yes, there it is. The confirmation
number is 873946.
5) Can you park the car for me? e) ( ) Sorry, but we don’t have a
reservation under your name.
6) Alright. Can you help me with my f) ( )Of course, sir. We provide
baggage? paid parking for guests.
At the reception desk
Receptionist Guest
1) What kind of room would you like, a) ( ) Non Smoking. Is there a
sir/madam? restaurant/ swimming pool/ a
sauna in the hotel?
2) Would you like a single room or a b) ( ) Can I have a room with a view
a double room? of the mountains?
3) Would you like a smoking or non- c) ( ) Thank you very much. Have a
smoking room? nice day.
4) The restaurant is on the first floor. d) ( )What floor is my room on?
5) Your room number is 709. It’s on the e) ( ) Could you please send my
seventh floor. luggage to my room?
6) Sure. We’ll send it right up. f) ( ) I’d like a single room, please.
In his/her room
Receptionist Guest
1) (on the telephone)Andrew. May I a) ( ) Sure, thanks a lot.
help you?
2) Someone will be right up. b) ( ) Can you send a chambermaid,
please?
3) I can make the call for you if c) ( ) Also, can I request a wake-up
you like. call for tomorrow morning at 7?
4) Oh, I’m very sorry. I will send d) ( ) Can you tell me how to make a
the maintenance man up for you. long distance call?
5) Sure, have a good night, sir. e) ( ) Oh, by the way, the lights
aren’t working in my room.
Can you send somebody up here?
Check out
Receptionist Guest
1) Good morning, sir. Are you ready a) ( )Can you call a taxi for me?
to check out?
2) Sure. What is your room number? b) ( ) My luggage is still in my room.
Could you send someone to get it?
3) Your minibar and telephone calls are c) ( ) 709. Here’s your key. Can you
included in your bill, sir/madam. calculate my bill please?
4) How would you like to pay? d) ( ) What forms of payment do you
accept?
5) The taxi will meet you in front of the e) ( ) I’d like to pay in credit card.
hotel entrance. Can you make a receipt for me?
6) Here you are. Sign here please. f) ( ) Have a nice day!
Listening, Reading & Speaking
1) Listen to a man making a reservation in a hotel and answer the questions at the website:
http://esl-lab.com/hotel1/hotel1.htm
2) Choose the best word to fill in the spaces from the dialogue you’ve just listened to:
2.1 Do you have any rooms with a _______________ where I can prepare basic meals?
a) ( ) cooking b) ( ) kitchenette c) ( ) suite
2.2 This hotel is one of the best in the city, and the employees try to roll out the __________ carpet
for special guests.
a) ( ) red b) ( ) blue c) ( ) green
2.3 This hotel is one of the best in the city, and the employees try to roll out the __________ carpet
for special guests.
a) ( ) cheap b) ( ) reasonable c) ( ) expensive
2.4 Let me ______________ to see if we have any rooms available.
a) ( ) test b) ( ) view c) ( ) check
2.5 I'd like to ______________ a hotel room for April 21st.
a) ( ) buy b) ( ) scheduled c) ( ) reserve
3) Work in pairs. Students A will be the guest, students B will be the receptionist. Use the
prompts below.
Checking-in
GUEST:
Hi! I’ve booked a single room in the name of ……
I have a reservation. My name is ………..
Hi! Do you have any vacancies? I need a twin room for 2 nights.
What is the price of a single room?
Is breakfast included?
What is the check-out time?
Is there the Internet here?
Is the reception open 24 hours a day?
Can I have a wake-up call? Can you please wake me up at 7 o’clock?
Is there room service?
Is there a bank near here?
RECEPTIONIST:
Good morning.
Sorry, what’s your name? How do you spell it? How do you pronounce it?
Just a moment, I’ll look it up. ……… Ah, here it is.
Can you fill in this form, please?
Sign here, please.
Can I have your passport, please?
Here is your key card. You’re in room no. 26 on the second floor.
The lift is at the end of the corridor.
You can take anything from the mini bar, we will put it on your bill.
You can use our restaurant, the TV room, the indoor swimming pool, or our laundry service.
Breakfast is served from 8:30 to 11:30.
4) Do you know what do these words mean? Look them up and choose the best answer.
4.1What’s a valet?
a) ( ) an employee who controls the way people are used and money is spent.
b) ( ) an employee of a restaurant or hotel, who puts your car in a parking space for you.
c) ( ) serves meals to people in a hotel restaurant.
4.2 What’s a chambermaid?
a) ( ) a woman whose job is to clean and tidy hotel bedrooms
b) ( ) a woman who cooks in the hotel kitchen.
c) ( ) a woman who gives information in the hotel.
4.3 What’s a concierge?
a) ( ) a person who is invited to visit someone's home or attend a particular social occasion.
b) ( ) someone whose job is to help people plan trips and make travel arrangements.
c) ( ) an employee whose job is to assist guests by booking tours, making theatre and restaurant
reservations, etc.
Reading & Reading Comprehension
Tipping Etiquette
*Tip is the money you give a waiter, for example, when the service in a restaurant is good.
The Secrets Behind Tipping Etiquette at Hotels
By Charlyn Keating Chisholm, About.com Guide
(…) Here's a general tipping guide to follow whenever you travel. Remember, tipping more or less is
at your discretion and should be guided by the quality of service you receive. Use this tipping guide
to give you an idea of the appropriate tipping ranges.
• Drivers
Courtesy Shuttle Driver -- $1-$2 per person, or $4-$5 per party
Taxi or Limousine Driver -- 15-20% of the total fare
Tipping drivers extra is expected if they handle your bags (tipping about $1-$2 per bag). (…)
• Checking In
Porter/Doorman -- $1-$2 per bag they help you with (more if it is very heavy). Tiping is not required for just
opening a door (a smile and thank you is always appreciated).
Bell Staff -- $1-$2 per bag if they bring the bags to your room. If they prepare your room and show you
around, tipping $5-$10 should cover everything (including the bags).
• In Your Room
Room Service -- In most hotels, a gratuity of 12-15% is already included in the price of your order (check the
menu). Tipping extra is OK, particularly if the person delivering the order takes extra care to set up your meal.
(…)
Maids/Housekeeping Staff -- A wide range is acceptable here, depending on the level of extra service and
hotel level, but generally from $1-$5 per night. It is best to do your tipping daily, since you might have
different people cleaning your room. (…)
Maintenance/Service People -- For fixing something that was broken, or bringing something that was
missing, tipping is not required.
Delivery of Special Items -- For a special request (like an extra blanket), $2 for one item, or $1 each for more
than one item.
• Coming and Going
Doorman -- $1-$2 for calling a cab; extra if he covers you with an umbrella in the rain (...)
Valet Parking -- $1-$2 to the attendant giving back your car. Tipping when they park the car is optional.
• Dining Out
Waitstaff -- 15-20% of the bill, excluding tax and expensive wine. Many restaurants automatically add a 15%
gratuity for parties of six or more, so check the menu. You can add another 5% for exceptional service.
Wine Steward/Sommelier -- If they help you choose a bottle of wine (or choose it for you), 10-20% of the
wine bill only. (…)
Buffet Servers -- $1-$2 per person dining.
• In the Lounge
Bartender/Cocktail Waitress -- 10-15% of the total tab.
• Special Services
(…) Hotel Staff -- If they set up something special for you (for your anniversary), tip at the end of your stay.
• Leisure Time
Hair Stylists -- 15% of the total bill. If someone else shampoo'd your hair, leave them $2-$5.
Manicurist -- 10-15% of the total bill.
Massage Therapist -- 15-20% of the total bill.
Swimming Pool Attendant -- Tipping is not required, unless you request extra service (…)
Fonte: adapted from http://hotels.about.com/od/hotelsecrets/a/tipping-etiquette.htm
1) Look at the cognates in the text and underline them. Now, circle all the numbers (they
are very important, especially in this text) and read the text again.
2) Can you remember?
a. How much you should tip a the maintenance people who fix something that was broken in
your room? ________________
b. How much you should tip the bell staff if they carry two of your bags? ________________
c. How much you should pay a doorman if they call you a taxi? ________________
d. How much you should tip the bartender? ________________
Summary
Hoje falamos da sua estadia, do seu conforto, das pessoas que o cercam geralmente quando
você viaja. Falamos também de situações que, se você ainda não viveu, viverá em breve, a trabalho.
Espero que tenha aproveitado a aula e que faça as atividades propostas. Por falar nisso, hoje você
tem mais um link para abrir no seu computador e verificar sua compreensão do conteúdo estudado na
aula de hoje!
Extra practice
• http://www.esl-galaxy.com/travel/At%20the%20hotel.pdf
See you next class!
Ana Célia Lima
Viviane Gomes Pontes
REFERÊNCIAS
About.com. Hotel secrets – Tipping etiquette. Online. Disponível em:
http://hotels.about.com/od/hotelsecrets/a/tipping-etiquette.htm. Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
Esl-lab.com. Hotel – Hotel Reservations. Online. Disponível em: http://esl-
lab.com/hotel1/hotel1.htm. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
Sk.com.br. Vocabulary for travelling. Online. Disponível em: http://www.sk.com.br/sk-travl.html.
Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Youtube.com. English for hotel and tourism – Checking into a hotel. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wyqfYJX23lg&feature=related. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
• Extra video
Esl-galaxy.com. Travel – At the Hotel. Online. Disponível em: http://www.esl-
galaxy.com/travel/At%20the%20hotel.pdf. Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
Unidade 3 – Compreensão auditiva e leitura
para comunicação em língua inglesa
English Basic Level
• 24th Lesson
In a Shop
‘
Introduction
Good morning! Good afternoon! Good evening!
Independente da hora do dia, essa é uma boa hora para aprender inglês! Hoje vamos falar de
gastos e vamos ver diálogos, textos e também um vídeo para ilustrar o tema de nossa aula.
Let’s start?!?
Vocabulary
Places - Shops and Stores
Here are the principal definitions of each word with an example sentence using the target word in context.
Shop = a place which sells various goods; store Janet went out quickly to get some things at the shop.
baker's a shop which sells bread and pastries Could you go to the baker's and get two loaves of whole-wheat bread?
butcher's a shop which sells various types of meat I went to the butcher's and bought a few steaks.
department store
a large store which sells a number of items located in various departments
There are a number of department stores located at the mall in the suburbs.
dry cleaner's a shop which cleans clothes Can you take these trousers down to the dry cleaner's?
fishmonger's a shop which sells fish (British English) Why don't we go get some salmon at the fishmonger's for dinner tonight?
fish-shop a shop which sells fish; fishmonger's Oh, look at that fresh fish in the fish-shop's window!
Aim
Aprender como fazer compras em inglês.
greengrocer's a shop which sells fruit and vegetables (British English)
I went out to get some fresh vegetables at the greengrocer's.
grocer's a shop which sells various food items Jack has just gone out to get some things at the grocer's.
ironmonger's a shop which sells materials and equipment for building (British English)
I bought a new hammer at the ironmonger's.
hardware store
a shop which sells materials and equipment for building (American English)
I need to get some paint at the hardware store before I can begin redecorating the apartment.
stationer's a shop which sells paper, pens and pencils and other writing materials (British English)
She bought three pens and some envelopes at the stationer's.
sweetshop a shop which sells candies and various sweet goods (British English)
I bought a half-pound of chocolates at the sweetshop.
tobacconist's a shop which sells tobacco goods such as cigarettes and cigars
He picked up three packs of cigarettes at the tobacconist's on his way to work.
1) Before you do your shopping, watch this video about some kinds of stores:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ceEcd46n60o
Words related to the action of buying…
• Words that describe the items they want to purchase: some bread, some milk, etc.
• Where can I find . . .?
• I’m looking for . . .
• Do you have . . . ?
If you want to go shopping there are a number of things you have to consider. If you would
like to find a bargain you should make sure to go to a sale. The only problem with a sale is that it is
sometimes hard to exchange something once you buy it. Many stores also refuse to give a refund on
anything you have bought. If you are looking for clothes, make sure to try them on, check the size to
make sure that it is a good fit. Another good idea is to look at the tag and label to see instructions for
washing, etc. It's always a good idea to also ask the shop assistant for advice. Finally, when you go to
the cashier you can usually pay by credit card or check if you don't have the cash. Never forget to get
the receipt!
Listening, Reading & Speaking
1) Read and listen about Wal-Mart at this link:
http://www.manythings.org/voa/places/205.html
2) Match the columns and get the meaning of the words below.
a) bargain ( ) a piece of paper or material fastened to an
object that gives information about it.
b) sale ( ) a document that you get from someone showing
that you have given them money or goods.
c) refund ( ) an event or period of time during which a store
reduces the prices of some of its goods.
d) tag ( ) money that was yours that you get again
e) receipt ( ) something you buy that costs much less than
normal.
3) Shopping Online or at local department stores is an activity many people enjoy. How
often do you go shopping for the following items and where do you buy them: clothing,
gifts for friends and family, music, DVD movies, electronics? Name places and discuss
with a friend.
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
4) Listen to the dialogue at the website http://www.esl-lab.com/shop1/shoprd1.htm
And answer the questions there.
5) Listen again and fill in the gaps to complete the dialogue.
Man: Hi young _______________.How may I help you?
Girl: Well, . . . yeah. I'm _______________for a Father's Day's gift.
Man: Okay. How about _______________your father a new wallet?
Girl: Hmm. How much is that wallet?
Man: Huh . . . which one?
Girl: The __________________one.
Man: Oh. It's only $40.95.
Girl: Huh? That's too ________________for me. Do you have a cheaper one?
Man: Hmm. How about this brown leather one?
Girl: Umm. . . I don't think my father will like the ______________on the outside, and it doesn't
have a _________________to put pictures.
6) Do the task below according to the prompts in parenthesis and the examples.
(A) (money) for (something)
• What do you think is cheap?
(1) Ten dollars for a shirt is cheap.
(2)
• What do you think is expensive?
(1)
(2)
• What do you think is a reasonable price to pay for a pair of shoes?
(1)
• What do you think is a reasonable price to pay for a dinner with a date?
(1)
(B) be (adjective)+er than,
• Make three comparative sentences using some of the following adjectives in the box:
(1) Fish is healthier than beef or pork.
(2)
(3)
(C) be more (adjective) than
• Make three sentences using some of the following adjectives:
cheap healthy roomy tight high low
spicy cozy safe fast big
delicious filling important powerful reliable affordable
environmentally friendly durable compact comfortable
(1) Compact cars are more environmentally friendly than gas guzzlers.
(2)
(3)
7) Have a conversation with a partner or write your answers about the questions below.
About how much did you spend on presents last year?
About how much do you usually spend each day?
Are you a price conscious shopper?
Are you good at saving money?
Are you saving money to buy something? If so, what are you planning to buy?
How much will it cost?
How much longer will you need to save before you can buy it?
Do banks pay a higher percent of interest here or in your country?
Do you compare prices at different stores when you shop?
Do you enjoy shopping?
Do you ever buy second-hand things? ("used things")
Reading & Reading Comprehension
In a Shop
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
1) Match the columns to complete the conversation.
Shopping for a Sweater
(A = shop assistant, B = customer)
A: Can I help you?
A: What size are you?
A: How about this one?
A: Certainly, there's the changing rooms
over there.
A: How does it fit?
A: Yes, here you are.
A: OK, how would you like to pay?
A: Yes, we do. Visa, Master Card and
American Express.
A: Thank you. Have a nice day!
( ) B: I'm an extra large.
( ) B: It's too large. Do you have a
larger one? (smallest?)
( ) B: Do you take credit cards?
( ) B: OK, here's my Visa.
( ) B: Thank you.
( ) B: Thank you, goodbye.
( ) B: Thank you. I'll have it, please.
( ) B: Yes, I'm looking for a sweater.
( ) B: Yes, that's nice. Can I try it
on?
Key Vocabulary
Can I help you? size - extra small, small, medium, large, extra large
Can I try it (them) on? How does it fit?
changing rooms How would you like to pay?
credit cards
Fonte: http://esl.about.com/od/beginnerpronunciation/a/bd_shop.htm
A Typical Shop Worker's Desk
2) Here is the story with ten words missing. Choose one these ten words below to fit into
the correct gap.
Shop workers probably have the ______________desks of all. The desks of shop workers are used
for a number of purposes. They often have a computer and a_____________to take care of
paper_____________, but they also use their desk as a place to lay their various____________as
they work at their different tasks. In many_____________shops, you will also be surprised at
how____________a shop worker's desk is! Shop workers have to do a variety
of______________tasks that often involve greasy equipment. Of course, the grease from the tools
and the_____________dirty the desk as the shop worker sits down to do a report or make a
telephone call. Shop_____________usually don't clean their desk too often as they know that the
desks will just get dirty the next time they_____________to have a cup of coffee.
Fonte: http://esl.about.com/library/beginner/bl_beginner_read_shopworker.htm
Summary
Hoje falamos de compras. Você gostou do assunto? Ainda temos muito o que estudar,
discutir, aprender... Esperamos que, com muita dedicação e motivação, você persevere nos estudos,
physical telephone workers untidiest work
dirty tools machine equipment sit down
mesmo após o término desta aula. Para incentivar e promover a sua curiosidade é que deixo dois
links de atividades relacionadas ao nosso tema da aula de hoje.
Enjoy it!!
Extra practice
• http://esl.about.com/library/vocabulary/blwordgroups_places_shops_q.htm
• http://www.esl-lab.com/eslbasic/shoppingmall-1.htm
See you soon!
Ana Célia Lima
Viviane Gomes Pontes
REFERÊNCIAS
Esl.about.com. English as 2nd Language – A Typical Shop Worker’s Desk. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/library/beginner/bl_beginner_read_shopworker.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Esl.about.com. English as 2nd Language – In a Shop. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/od/beginnerpronunciation/a/bd_shop.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Esl.about.com. English as 2nd Language – Places, Shops and Stores. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/library/vocabulary/blwordgroups_places_shops_e.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez.
2010.
Esl-lab.com. Shopping – Shopping for the Day. Online. Disponível em: http://www.esl-
lab.com/shop1/shoprd1.htm. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
ManyThings.org. Places – Walmart (American Mosaic 2009). Online. Disponível em:
http://www.manythings.org/voa/places/205.html. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
Youtube.com. Let’s go shopping. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ceEcd46n60o. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
• Extra links
Esl.about.com. English as 2nd Language – Places, Shops and Stores. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/library/vocabulary/blwordgroups_places_shops_q.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez.
2010.
Esl-lab.com. Shopping centers – Malls and Department Stores. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.esl-lab.com/eslbasic/shoppingmall-1.htm. Acesso em: 31 dez. 2010.
Unidade 3 – Compreensão auditiva e leitura
para comunicação em língua inglesa
English Basic Level
• 25th Lesson
In the Street
Introduction
Hello! Are you fine?
Hoje vamos falar sobre como não ficar perdido e como perguntar as direções na rua, em
inglês. Temos muito o que estudar nesta aula e você vai aprender a dar localizações e a perguntar
para chegar aonde quer ir.
Are you ready to start? So, let’s go!
Vocabulary
Preposition Use - in / at / on - prepositions of place
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
IN
Use 'in' with spaces:
in a room / in a building
in a garden / in a park
Use 'in' with bodies of water:
in the water
in the sea
in a river
Use 'in' with lines:
in a row / in a line
in a queue
AT
Use 'at' with places:
at the bus-stop
at the door
at the cinema
at the end of the street
Use 'at' with places on a page:
at the top of the page
at the bottom of the page
Use 'at' in groups of people:
at the back of the class
at the front of the class
ON
Use 'on' with surfaces:
on the ceiling / on the wall / on
the floor
on the table
Use 'on' with small islands:
I stayed on Maui.
Use 'on' with directions:
on the left
on the right
straight on
Aim
Conhecer como são indicadas as direções em inglês.
• IMPORTANT NOTES
In / at / on the corner
We say 'in the corner of a room', but 'at the corner (or 'on the corner') of a street'
In / at / on the front
We say 'in the front / in the back' of a car
We say 'at the front / at the back' of buildings / groups of people
We say 'on the front / on the back' of a piece of paper
1) Now that you have studied the use of on / at / in as a preposition of place, try the follow-
up quiz to test your understanding at http://esl.about.com/library/quiz/blgrquiz_prep1.htm.
2) Test your understanding, watch this video at Youtube
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=B5wPc_4bfbQ .
3) Put the words in the box into the blank spaces below:
• Directions by street name and nearby landmarks:
A: You look _________________. Can I help?
B: Yeah. I’m __________________ for the Caprice Theater. Do you know ______________ it is?
A: It’s on the _________________ of Elm Street and 22nd Avenue. It’s ______________ to the Art
Gallery. You can’t _________________ it.
• Directions by Subway or Bus:
A: Excuse me. Can I trouble you for a _____________?
B: Sure. What’s wrong?
A: I’m lost. Do you know _________ to get ________ the Stadium?
across how looking lost miss moment
off on take to transfer way
where next corner down exit far
front left your
B: The easiest _________ to get there is probably by subway. Just ___________ the Central Line to
Broadway Station. ______________ to the Green Line and Get __________ at Harbour Station. If
you go out ___________ number four it should be right in ____________ of you.
• Directions by Foot or Car:
A: Can I get to the Harlton Hotel from here _____________ foot?
B: Sure. It’s not that ______________. Just go ______________ 4th Avenue to Main Street. Turn
______________ on Main. It should be on ______________ right. It’s _______________ from the
park.
Fonte: http://lcrb.org/lessons/Lesson_1007.pdf
4) Look at the picture of the Town map below and give directions to the places, eliciting
street and corner street and what it is next to or across from. REMEMBER, you are on
the corner of Second Avenue and Forest Street:
a. The jewelry store ____________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
b. The bar ____________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
c. The police station ____________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
d. The toy store ________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
e. The movie theater ____________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
f. The sporting goods store ______________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Fonte: http://www.englishadvantage.info/lesson/giving-directions/
Listening & Reading
1) Take a look at the map below.
2) Now, go to the website http://www.esl-lab.com/eslbasic/travel-sightseeing-1.htm play the
listening and complete the sentences with the words missing. Then, mark the sentences
true or false.
a. The hotel is next to the _____________.
( ) True ( ) False
b. The zoo is ____________ the police station.
( ) True ( ) False
c. The __________ is between the post office and the supermarket.
( ) True ( ) False
d. The bowling alley is on _________ Street.
( ) True ( ) False
e. The _______________ corner of ________ Street and ________ Street.
( ) True ( ) False
f. ______________ front of ________________.
( ) True ( ) False
g. ______________________________________________.
( ) True ( ) False
h. ______________________________________________.
( ) True ( ) False
i. ______________________________________________.
( ) True ( ) False
j. ____________________________________________.
( ) True False
3) To practice a little bit more, go to the website http://www.elllo.org/games/games/12-LG-
Directions.htm, play the “listen” button and try to find the corr ect place in the map.
Reading & Reading Comprehension
Business English - Directions to a Meeting
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
Text I
Directions to a Meeting
Mark: Linda, do you know how to get to Daniels Co.? I've never been there before.
Heather: Are you driving or taking the subway?
Mark: The subway.
Heather: Right. Take the no. 9 from West 72nd street. Get off at Times Square and change to the
shuttle. Go across town and get off at Grand Central station. Go above ground and walk north on
Park Avenue.
Mark: Just a moment, let me write this down!
Heather: Take the no. 9 from West 72nd street. Get off at Times Square and change to the shuttle.
Got it?
Mark: Yes, thanks. Now, once I get to Times Square, which train do I take?
Heather: Change to the shuttle. Go across town and get off at Grand Central station. Go above
ground and walk north on Park Avenue.
Mark: Can you repeat that?
Heather: Change to the shuttle. Go across town and get off at Grand Central station. Go above
ground and walk north on Park Avenue.
Mark: Thanks Heather. How long does it take?
Heather: It takes about a half an hour. When is your meeting?
Mark: It's at nine. I'll leave at eight-thirty.
Heather: That's a busy time of day. You should leave at eight.
Mark: OK. Thanks, Heather.
Heather: No problem.
Key Vocabulary
to get to somewhere
to take the subway
to change to another train
to go across town
to get off
to go above ground
to walk north / south / west / east
to take time
a busy time of day
Fonte: http://esl.about.com/od/businessreading/a/d_mdirect.htm
1) Check your understanding of the text above at :
http://esl.about.com/library/quiz/bl_mdirect.htm.
Reading Dialogue: Directions to the Museum
Text II
(On the street corner)
Tourist: Excuse me, can you help me? I'm lost!
Person: Certainly, where would you like to go?
Tourist: I'd like to go to the museum, but I can't find it. Is it far?
Person: No, not really. It's about a 5 minute walk.
Tourist: Maybe I should call a taxi ...
Person: No, no. It's very easy. Really. (pointing) I can give you directions.
Tourist: Thank you. That's very kind of you.
Person: Not at all. ... Now, go along this street to the traffic lights. Do you see them?
Tourist: Yes, I can see them.
Person: Right, at the traffic lights, turn left into Queen Mary Avenue.
Tourist: Queen Mary Avenue.
Person: Right. Go straight on. Take the second left and enter Museum Drive.
Tourist: OK. Queen Mary Avenue, straight on and then the third left, Museum Drive.
Person: No, it's the SECOND left.
Tourist: Ah, right. The second street on my left.
Person: Right. Just follow Museum Drive and the museum is at the end of the road.
Tourist: Great. Thanks again for your help.
Person: Not at all.
Fonte: http://esl.about.com/od/intermediatereading/a/d_museum.htm
2) Check your understanding of the text above at :
http://esl.about.com/library/quiz/bl_musuem.htm.
Summary
Na aula de hoje você aprendeu a não se perder, se precisar de se comunicar em inglês,
principalmente com a ajuda de um mapa. Você também viu algumas preposições necessárias para
pedir e dar direções. Recomendo a você mais dois links para que leia, entenda e estude essa matéria.
Practice makes perfect!
Extra practice
• http://esl.about.com/od/intermediateconversation/a/Asking-Directions.htm
• http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/radio/specials/1655_how_to_ask/page2.s
html
Bye!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Elllo.org. Games – Directions. Online. Disponível em: http://www.elllo.org/games/games/12-LG-
Directions.htm. Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
EnglishAdvantage.info. Giving Directions. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.englishadvantage.info/lesson/giving-directions/. Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
Esl.about.com. English as 2nd Language – Prepositions of Place. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/od/grammarintermediate/a/prepositions_of_place.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Esl.about.com. English as 2nd Language – Quiz on Prepositions. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/library/quiz/blgrquiz_prep1.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Esl.about.com. English as 2nd Language – Business Reading, Directions to a Meeting. Online.
Disponível em: http://esl.about.com/od/businessreading/a/d_mdirect.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Esl.about.com. English as 2nd Language – Quiz on Directions to a Meeting. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/library/quiz/bl_mdirect.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Esl.about.com. English as 2nd Language – Reading, Directions to the Museum. Online. Disponível
em: http://esl.about.com/od/intermediatereading/a/d_museum.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Esl.about.com. English as 2nd Language – Quiz on Directions to the Museum. Online. Disponível
em: http://esl.about.com/library/quiz/bl_musuem.htm. Acesso em: 30 dez. 2010.
Esl-lab.com. Travel – sightseeing. Online. Disponível em: http://www.esl-lab.com/eslbasic/travel-
sightseeing-1.htm. Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
LCRB.org. Giving Directions. Online. Disponível em: http://lcrb.org/lessons/Lesson_1007.pdf.
Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
Youtube.com. Giving directions in English. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=B5wPc_4bfbQ. Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
• Extra links
BBC.co.uk. Learning English – How to ask directions. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/radio/specials/1655_how_to_ask/page2.shtml.
Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
Esl.about.com. English as 2nd Language – Conversation, Asking Directions. Online. Disponível
em: http://esl.about.com/od/intermediateconversation/a/Asking-Directions.htm. Acesso em: 03 jan.
2011.
Unidade 3 – Compreensão auditiva e leitura
para comunicação em língua inglesa
English Basic Level
• 26th Lesson
At the restaurant
Introduction
Hi! Is everything ok with you?
Pense no seu restaurante e no seu prato favorito... Pensou? Agora você vai estudar e praticar
como se comunicar em um restaurante e fazer esse pedido a um garçom!
Enjoy this class!
Vocabulary
Aim
Aprender estruturas frasais e vocabulário mais usados em um restaurante: como pedir
um prato ou a conta.
1) To order a meal in a restaurant you need some vocabulary. Watch, listen to this video
and repeat the words at http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9qMrqdbOihg&feature=related.
2) Look at the useful words to use in a conversation at a restaurant below:
• Places to Eat Out
Bistro Fast Food Restaurant
Hotel Restaurant Pub
Restaurant Snack Bar
• Parts of a Menu
1st Appetizers/Entrees/Hors D'oeuvres Soups /Starters 2nd Main Courses (Meat/Fish/Vegetarian) 3rd Desserts
Beverages (Drinks in general, coffee etc.) Wine/Drinks List (sometimes on a separate menu)
Booking a table At the Restaurant Ordering
I'd like to book (reserve) a table for two at 8.30 pm, please. I'd like to book a table for a party of four at 9 pm, please. I'd like to book a table for four at 7 in the name of Smith, please. Could I have a table by (next to) the window, please? Could I have a non-smoking table, please? Could I have a table away from the toilets, please? Could you make sure it's a quiet table, please?
Good evening, the name is Smith. I have a table booked for four. Do you have the menu in Portuguese/Spanish ..., please? Do you have a high chair for young children, please? Could we have a table over there, please? I'm sorry but I asked for a table by the window. Could we have an extra chair, please?
I'd like .............., please. For starters I'll have the … and for the main course I'd like the … Could I have chips instead of baked potatoes, please? What is the house special today? Is there anything you would recommend? Could I see the wine menu, please? I'll have a bottle of the …. I'll have a glass of house red/white, please. Which wine would you recommend?
Complaining During &After the Meal Paying
Excuse me, but my soup is cold. Excuse me, we've been waiting for over half an hour for our drinks. I'm sorry but I ordered a side salad not the vegetables. Excuse me this steak is over done, I ordered rare. I'm afraid this wine tastes corked. Excuse me this wine isn't chilled properly.
Could we have some more bread, please? Do you have a pepper mill? Could I have some dressing / sauce, please? Could you pass me the salt, please? That was delicious. My compliments to the chef.
Could I have the bill, please? Do you take Credit Card / check? We'd like separate bills, please. Is service included? No, please. This is on me. (When you want to pay for everyone.)
http://www.learnenglish.de/vocabulary/eatout.htm
3) Match the two columns and order the dialogue:
Ordering a Meal
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
(A = waiter, B = customer)
A: Hi. How are you doing this afternoon?
A: Certainly, here you are.
A: Grilled tuna and cheese.
A: Would you like something to drink?
A: Thank you. (returning with the food) Here
you are. Enjoy your meal!
A: Can I get you anything else?
A: That'll be $6.75.
A: Thank you! Have a good day!
( ) B: Bye.
( ) B: Fine, thank you. Can I see a menu,
please?
( ) B: Here you are. Keep the change!
( ) B: No, thanks. I'd like the check (bill -
UK English), please.
( ) B: Thank you.
( ) B: Thank you. What's today's special?
( ) B: That sounds good. I'll have that.
( ) B: Yes, I'd like a coke.
Key Vocabulary
Can I see a menu?
Here you are
Enjoy your meal!
Would you like ...
Can I get you anything else?
I'd like the check (bill - UK English), please.
That'll be $6.75.
Have a good day!
Adaptado de: http://esl.about.com/od/beginnerpronunciation/a/bd_restaurant.htm
Listening & Reading
1) Watch this video at http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=y5dkB_Bcb_M&feature=related.
Then, practice the sentences by repeating.
2) Read the dialogue below:
Ordering at a Restaurant
Waitress: Hi, welcome to our restaurant.
Customer: Thank you very much.
Waitress: How many people are there?
Customer: Just the one.
Waitress: Just one person, ok. Smoking or non-smoking?
Customer: Non-smoking, please.
Waitress: Come along and have a seat right here.
Customer: Thanks.
Waitress: Here are your menus and a glass of water.
Waitress: Can I get you something to drink?
Customer: Mmm I was wondering about this wine actually. What’s your house wine?
Waitress: Our house wine is this red wine right here and it’s 10 dollars.
Customer: Oh, I think I’ll have a glass of that actually.
Waitress: Just a glass?
Customer: How much is it for a bottle?
Waitress: 10 dollars.
Customer: Oh sorry. Yeah I’ll have a bottle then, thanks.
Waitress: Can I take your order for an appetiser?
Customer: Mmm I quite like the look of several of these. Now the melon, does that come with
anything else?
Waitress: The melon? It just comes with some garnish, but it’s pretty much just plain melon with
garnish and some whipped cream.
Customer: What would you recommend?
Waitress: Well, I really recommend the fries. They’re quite good and they come with cheese and
tomatoes and some chile on top.
Customer: Oh, they sound nice. Ok, I’ll have those, thanks.
Waitress: Are you ready to order your meal?
Customer: Yes, I think I’m ready now. I think I’ll have this vegetable goulash.
Can you tell me, is it vegetarian?
Waitress: It is, actually. It’s all vegetarian but it does come with cheese.
Customer: Oh, that’s ok, I eat cheese. Do I get any with it?
Waitress: It comes with a side order of rice or potatoes.
Customer: I’d like rice, please.
Waitress: Ok.
Waitress: Did you enjoy your meal?
Customer: It was delicious, thank you.
Waitress: Can I get you anything else?
Customer: Oh, I’d like to look at the desert menu, please. Mm, these all look nice. Oh, I think I must
go for this chocolate cake here.
Waitress: Chocolate cake. Very good choice. That’s our most popular dish.
Customer: Could I get cream with it, please?
Waitress: Would you like custard or whipped cream?
Customer: Whipped cream, please.
Waitress: Coming right up.
Customer: Could I have the bill, please?
Waitress: Certainly. Here you go.
Customer: Mmm 30 dollars. Oh, that’s ok, that’s not too bad.
Waitress: Thank you for coming.
Customer: Ok, no problem.
Waitress: Bye, come again!
Customer: Bye!
3) Now, listen to the same dialogue at http://www.elllo.org/english/0501/512-Akane-
Restaurant.html and practice the sentences.
Reading & Reading Comprehension
Ordering Food in a Restaurant
One of the most important tasks in English is ordering food when you go to a restaurant.
There are basic forms and questions, as well food vocabulary that you can use in places where people
speak English.
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
1) Take a look at this Menu:
Starters
Chicken Soup $2.50
Salad $3.25
Sandwiches - Main Course
Ham and cheese $3.50
Tuna $3.00
Vegetarian $4.00
Grilled Cheese $2.50
Piece of Pizza $2.50
Cheeseburger $4.50
Hamburger deluxe $5.00
Spaghetti $5.50
Drinks
Coffee $1.25
Tea $1.25
Soft Drinks - Coke, Sprite, Root Beer, etc. $1.75
2) Choose from the Menu above and decide what you would like in this restaurant. Write
your options for Starters, Main Course and Drinks:
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
3) Read this dialogue:
Waiter: Hello, can I help you?
Kim: Yes, I'd like to have some lunch.
Waiter: Would you like a starter?
Kim: Yes, I'd like a bowl of chicken soup, please.
Waiter: And what would you like for a main course?
Kim: I'd like a grilled cheese sandwich.
Waiter: Would you like anything to drink?
Kim: Yes, I'd like a glass of coke, please.
Waiter... After Kim has her lunch.: Can I bring you anything else?
Kim: No, thank you. Just the bill.
Waiter: Certainly.
Kim:I don't have my glasses. How much is the lunch?
Waiter: That's $6.75.
Kim: Here you are. Thank you very much.
Waiter: You're welcome. Have a good day.
Kim: Thank you, the same to you.
• Notice how the waiter asks: What would you like? and Kim responds: I'd like ...
"Would like" is the polite form used when asking and requesting.
4) Fill in the gaps with the correct word. Do NOT look at the text above!
Waiter: Hello, Can I _______________ you?
Kim: Yes, _______________ to have some lunch.
Waiter: _______________ a starter?
Kim: Yes, I'd like a bowl of chicken soup, _______________.
Waiter: And what_______________ for a main course?
Kim: I'd like a grilled cheese sandwich.
Waiter: Would you like_______________ to drink?
Kim: Yes, I'd like a glass of coke, please.
Waiter... After Kim has her lunch.: Can I bring you anything else?
Kim: No, thank you. Just the_______________.
Waiter: Certainly.
Kim:I don't have my glasses. _______________ is the lunch?
Waiter: That's $6.75.
Kim: _______________. Thank you very much.
Waiter: You're_______________. Have a good day.
Kim: Thank you, the_______________.
Adaptado de: http://esl.about.com/library/beginner/blwouldlike.htm
My Favorite Restaurant
I like to eat out and I go to a (1)___________ for dinner twice a week. I (2)__________ with my
husband, Bill.
Our (3)___________ restaurant is an Indian restaurant in Cleveland Street in Surry Hills. It is not
very big (4)___________ it is always busy. There are only a (5)___________ tables in the restaurant
and there is a white (6)___________ on each table. There is also a vase with (7)___________
flowers on each table. There are plants in the (8)___________. We usually (9)___________ hot
curries and eat them with rice. The food is (10)___________ so we enjoy it very much. The service
is (11)___________ and friendly.
Bill and I always have a (12)___________ evening at our favorite restaurant.
• These are the words to choose from:
5) Choose the right word from the list to fill in the gaps.
BUT CORNERS DELICIOUS FAVORITE FEW GO LOVELY ORDER PLEASANT QUICK RESTAURANT TABLECLOTH
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
I really hate ______________. I prefer to go to a good ______________that serves everything,
including the ______________, using the best ______________. Sometimes, I like to
______________ something that I have tried at home. First, I look up the ______________in the
______________and then I cook the ______________. Next, I go to the restaurant, and when the
______________comes to my table I ask for the ______________and order what I have already
cooked at home! Sometimes, I like to go out for a ______________. You can have a drink in either a
______________or a ______________, which are usually nicer. At the end of the evening, it's time
to ask for the ______________and, usually, if the ______________has been good, it's a good idea to
leave a 15%-20% tip.
Adaptado de: http://esl.about.com/od/vocabularybeginners/a/Gap-Fill-Food-And-Restaurants.htm
Summary
Hoje vimos como você deve se comportar em um restaurante, como fazer pedidos e
comunicar-se com os garçons e pessoas nesses ambientes. Coloque em prática os diálogos, veja os
vídeos e pesquise mais. Para ajudá-lo a desenvolver esse vocabulário da aula de hoje, você vai ler e
estudar através dos dois links que deixo como seu homework.
Enjoy your time to study!
Extra practice
• http://www.esl-lab.com/rest1.htm
• http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/business/tendays/day10videobd.shtml
BAR BILL COOKBOOK DESSERT DISH FAST FOOD INGREDIENTS LOUNGE MENU ORDER RECIPE RESTAURANT SERVICE TAKE-AWAY TIP WAIT PERSON
BAR BILL COOKBOOK DESSERT DISH FAST FOOD INGREDIENTS LOUNGE MENU ORDER RECIPE RESTAURANT SERVICE TAKE-AWAY TIP WAIT PERSON
See you!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Beare, Kenneth (esl.about.com website). English as 2nd Language – At a Restaurant. Online.
Disponível em: http://esl.about.com/od/beginnerpronunciation/a/bd_restaurant.htm. Acesso em: 03
jan. 2011.
Beare, Kenneth (esl.about.com website). English as 2nd Language – Food and Restaurants.
Online. Disponível em: http://esl.about.com/od/vocabularybeginners/a/Gap-Fill-Food-And-
Restaurants.htm. Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
Beare, Kenneth (esl.about.com website). English as 2nd Language – Ordering Food in a
Restaurant. Online. Disponível em: http://esl.about.com/library/beginner/blwouldlike.htm. Acesso
em: 03 jan. 2011.
Elllo.org. At the Restaurant – Akane Restaurant. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.elllo.org/english/0501/512-Akane-Restaurant.html . Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
Youtube.com. English Vocabulary – Restaurant. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9qMrqdbOihg&feature=related. Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
• Extra links
BBC.co.uk. Learning English – 10 Days in Manchester. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/business/tendays/day10videobd.shtml. Acesso
em: 03 jan. 2011.
Davis, Randall (esl-lab.com website). Ordering at a Restaurant. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.esl-lab.com/rest1.htm. Acesso em: 03 jan. 2011.
Unidade 4 – Uso do Inglês como Ferramenta de Negociação
Business English
• 27th Lesson
Writing a letter / e-mail
Formality x Informality
Introduction
Hello! Are you all right?
In this lesson we are going to practice and develop your business writing skills in English. I
hope you appreciate it!
Have a great class!
Aim
In this lesson we are going to read and study business writing.
Vocabulary
WRITING BUSINESS LETTERS
Useful phrases
• Salutation Dear Mr Brown Dear Ms White Dear Sir(s) Dear Madam Dear Sir or Madam Gentlemen
• Starting We are (I am) writing to inform you that ... to confirm ... to request ... to enquire about... I am contacting you for the following reason. I recently read/heard about . . . and would like to know . . . Having seen your advertisement in ... , I would like to ... I would be interested in (obtaining/receiving) ... I received your address from ... and would like to ... I am writing to tell you about ...
• Referring to previous contact Thank you for your letter of March 15 ... Thank you for contacting us. In reply to your request ... Thank you for your letter regarding ... With reference to our telephone conversation yesterday ... Further to our meeting last week ... It was a pleasure meeting you in London last month. I enjoyed having lunch with you last week in Tokyo. I would just like to confirm the main points we discussed on Tuesday . . .
• Making a request We would appreciate it if you would ... I would be grateful if you could... Could you please send me . . . Could you possibly tell us/let us have...
In addition, I would like to receive ... It would be helpful if you could send us ... I am interested in (obtaining/receiving...) I would appreciate your immediate attention to this matter. Please, let me know what action you propose to take…
• Offering help We would be happy to ... Would you like us to ... We are quite willing to ... Our company would be pleased to ...
• Giving good news We are pleased to announce that ... I am delighted to inform you that ... You will be pleased to learn that ...
• Giving bad news We regret to inform you that ... I'm afraid it would not be possible to ... Unfortunately we cannot/we are unable to ... After careful consideration we have decided (not) to ...
• Complaining I am writing to express my dissatisfaction with ... I am writing to complain about ... Please note that the goods we ordered on (date) have not yet arrived. We regret to inform you that our order n°--- is now considerably overdue. I would like to query the transport charges which seem unusually high.
• Apologizing We are sorry for the delay in replying ... I regret any inconvenience caused
I would like to apologize for (the delay/the inconvenience) ... Once again, I apologise for any inconvenience.
• Orders Thank you for your quotation of ... We are pleased to place an order with your company for ... We would like to cancel our order n°... Please confirm receipt of our order. I am pleased to acknowledge receipt of your order n°... Your order will be processed as quickly as possible. It will take about (three) weeks to process your order. We can guarantee delivery before ... Unfortunately these articles are no longer available/are out of stock.
• Prices Please, send us your price list. You will find enclosed our most recent catalogue and price list. Please, note that our prices are subject to change without notice. We have pleasure in enclosing a detailed quotation. We can make you a firm offer of ... Our terms of payment are as follows:
• Referring to payment Our records show that we have not yet received payment of ... According to our records ... Please, send payment as soon as possible. You will receive a credit note for the sum of ...
• Enclosing documents I am enclosing ...
Please, find enclosed ... You will find enclosed ...
• Closing remarks If we can be of any further assistance, please let us know. If I can help in any way, please do not hesitate to contact me. If you require more information ... For further details ... Thank you for taking this into consideration. Thank you for your help. We hope you are happy with this arrangement. We hope you can settle this matter to our satisfaction.
• Referring to future business We look forward to a successful working relationship in the future. We would be (very) pleased to do business with your company. I would be happy to have an opportunity to work with your firm.
• Referring to future contact I look forward to seeing you next week. Looking forward to hearing from you. " " to receiving your comments. I look forward to meeting you on the 15th I would appreciate a reply at your earliest convenience.
• Ending business letters Sincerely, } Yours sincerely, } (for all customers/clients) Sincerely yours, } Regards, (for those you already know and/or with whom you already have a working relationship)
Reading & Practice
Why to Study Business English?
There is almost no argument that the English language has become the international language
for communication around the globe. When we specifically examine the workings of the world of
business, we see that it too, is becoming globalized, as corporations and business ventures are
constantly striving to expand and break through into global markets and dispersing company centers
worldwide.
The result is that employees and executives alike, now have to work hard to improve their
Business English in order to increase the success rates on that next major business deal and to be able
to confidently interact with people in work settings, which are gradually becoming more culturally
and linguistically diverse. English is the key to overcoming such diversity.
Business Writing
Writing has always been an essential part of doing business, as any proposal, agreement or
contract must always be given in writing so as to make it formal and valid, in the name of both
proper business conduct and for legal purposes. Often, we think of software for business finances,
business plans, or project management before considering software for business writing and
communication. It is a well-known fact that the best work opportunities are reserved for candidates
with the best Business English skills, of which writing is increasingly important. At the website
http://www.whitesmoke.com/business-writing.html you can try your business writing skills and
improve your writing.
* (Há uma ferramenta no canto direito, na parte do meio da tela, onde você pode escrever o
seu texto e o software o corrige automaticamente.)
Sample Letter
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
Here is a sample letter using some of the forms you have seen at the vocabulary:
Ken's Cheese House 34 Chatley Avenue Seattle, WA 98765
Tel:
Fax: Email: [email protected]
October 23, 2006
Fred Flintstone Sales Manager Cheese Specialists Inc. 456 Rubble Road Rockville, IL
Dear Mr. Flintstone
With reference to our telephone conversation today, I am writing to confirm your order for: 120 x Cheddar Deluxe Ref. No. 856
The order will be shipped within three days via UPS and should arrive at your store in about 10 days.
Please, contact us again if we can help in any way.
Yours sincerely,
Kenneth Beare Director of Ken's Cheese House
Source: http://esl.about.com/cs/onthejobenglish/a/a_basbletter.htm
1) Number the parts of a letter in the correct order, according to the sample letter above:
a. Salutation _____
b. Signature _____
c. Date _____
d. Receiver’s address _____
e. Complimentary close _____
f. Body of the letter _____
g. Letterhead / sender’s address _____
2) Now that you know the vocabulary to use and that you have an example of a letter,
choose a topic and write a formal business letter. Send it by e-mail to your tutor.
---------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Tips for Better Business Emails
Nowadays, people exchange business emails more than they do business letters. However,
writing business emails leaves room for some questions. For example, should you write in a formal
business tone or in a casual tone? If you want to know how to write better business emails, then read
these five tips:
1. Provide an informative and short subject line
The subject line is important because it alerts your reader as to what your email is about, so
make sure you write a short but informative subject line. Never write a long sentence as your subject
line; a few words describing your email content or purpose will do. And never leave the subject line
blank either.
2. Make your email brief and get straight to the point
You don’t need to write a novel. Long emails can be boring to read. Just write a brief and
concise text explaining your purpose. If you need to elicit a response from your reader, formulate
questions that need short answers like “yes” and “no” (this questions start with auxiliaries like do,
have, is, was, did, can, etc.).
3. Write in a conversational tone
Business emails can have a conversational tone that is less formal than a normal business
letter. However, be careful not to make your tone too casual or too familiar. You should also write in
proper business English as much as possible.
4. Limit your use of emoticons
Some business emails may allow the use of emoticons, but this is usually done when the
people exchanging emails have already established a business relationship. Generally, you should
limit or avoid the use of emoticons because they will make your email look unprofessional. Using
emoticons in your cover letter as you apply for a job, for example, is unacceptable.
5. Proofread your email and run a spell check and grammar check
Check if your email has grammatical and typographical errors. If you have a hard time
writing business English, try WhiteSmoke's Business English version program to help you.
Source: http://www.whitesmoke.com/5-tips-for-better-business-emails
How to write an email
Emails are generally shorter than letters. As they are often written quickly, in response to a
request or question, they may contain only a few lines. Informal English, abbreviations, and absence
of standard salutations are common when you write emails.
• Emails may contain the following elements:
- Subject line = This shows the reader the exact subject of the email
- (Salutation) = This is optional. Some people start with "Hi", others with the first name "Clare",
or others with no name or salutation at all.
- Reason for writing
- Main point
- (Closing) = There are a variety of closing phrases, such as "Cheers" or "Thanks". These are
also optional.
How to write better emails
1. Use a descriptive subject line. Don’t write "Urgent"; write "Meeting at 10am about pay rise".
Use a subject line each time you reply to an email, to avoid subject lines starting Re: or R:R:
Be careful to avoid writing general subject lines, such as "Hello" or "Hi", as some email providers
automatically delete these as spam.
2. Keep your emails short. Try to keep to only one point in each email. If necessary, you can send
more emails on different points. If you write a descriptive subject line for each email, it's easier for
your reader to understand the content of your email. (…)
3. Write simple, direct English. This is especially important if you're writing to someone whose first
language is not English. Here are some ways of writing simple English:
- use active forms, not passive forms;
- write short sentences, not long ones;
- use common words, not technical or jargon words if your reader is not in the same field as you.
4. Make sure your reader knows what to do next. Help your reader act on your email. For example, if
you want your reader to find some information for you, write "Please can you find me the sales
figures for 2009" instead of the vaguer "I'm going to need the sales figures for 2009".
5. Reduce the amount of email you send:
- make a phone call rather than write an email. This is particularly effective if you only want a quick
piece of information;
- only send an email to the people who need to see it. Don't automatically click "reply to all" if only
one or two people need to read your message;
- don't take part in chain emails (when you have to forward something on to five of your best friends,
for example);
- don't reply to spam.
6. Don't send heavy attachments. If possible, send a zip file, or give web addresses where your reader
can find information.
7. Be careful what you write in your email. Try to make your emails informative and polite, and use
a neutral tone. Remember that your reader could forward your email to other people, so only write
what you would be happy for other people to read. (No gossip, no personal comments, no
confidential information and no ambiguous English such as sarcastic humour.)
Avoid using emoticons and smilies in business emails, or too many exclamation marks.
8. Check your email before you send it. Use a spell check to eliminate spelling mistakes. Read your
email aloud to check for grammar and punctuation errors. Ask yourself these questions:
"Is this clear?"
"Does my reader know what to do next?"
"Is this polite?"
There are a number of ways to start the email. In many cases, you can copy the sender and
use the same greeting, but if you are the one to write first, here are some possible greetings:
- Friends and colleagues = "Hi" is informal, and you can use it for friends and colleagues. You can
also use "Hello" or "Hello + first name" if you know the person well.
- For acquaintances = Use "Dear Mr. Jones" / "Dear Ms Jones" if you know the name of the person.
Like with letters, use Ms instead of Miss or Mrs.
- Formal emails = If you don't know the name of the person, you can write "Dear Sir", "Dear
Madam" or "Dear Sir / Madam".
- Writing to a group of people = If you are writing to a group of people, you could use a collective
noun: "Dear customers", "Dear partners". If you are writing to a group of people who work in the
same company or department, you could write "Dear All", "Dear colleagues", or "Hello everyone".
- Writing to a group of bosses in your company = Here you could write "Dear Managers", "Dear
Directors" or "Dear Board members".
- No greeting = Often in companies, you write quick emails to colleagues. Using email in this way is
almost like using the telephone. In these situations, you don't need to write any greeting or name, but
just start the message.
Starting your email
Your first sentence should tell the reader what your email is about. Here are four of the most
common reasons for writing an email, along with some sentences you can use to start:
1. Replying to a previous email = Thanks for the information. / Thanks for your phone call. / Thanks
for getting me the figures.
2. Giving brief updates = Just a quick note to tell you… / Just a quick note to let you know… / Just
to update you on…
3. Referring to an attachment = Take a look at the attached file. / Have a quick look at the file I've
attached about… Thought you might find the attached interesting.
4. Changing plans = Sorry, but I can't make the meeting tomorrow. / Sorry, but I won't be able to
meet you next week. / Sorry, but something has come up and I can't meet you for lunch.
Your first sentence should only have one theme. For example, your reason for writing may be
to ask for help, or to share some information, or to ask a question. Your first sentence for these
different situations could be: "Have you got a few minutes to help me with…?" / "Just wanted to let
you know…" / "Regarding X, can you tell me if…?"
If you have more than one reason for writing, give each reason its own paragraph. It doesn't
matter if your paragraph is only one line long. In fact, the extra space helps your reader to understand
you have more than one reason for writing, and that each reason is different from the other.
Sample email writing
Hi, Sandra,
Just wanted to let you know we got the project! They're signing tomorrow, so we should be starting
the planning next week.
Regarding your presentation to them last year, do you still have the powerpoint files?
Thanks
3) Now that you know some tips for writing business emails, go to the website
http://www.whitesmoke.com/how-to-write-a-business-email read the explanations and the
examples and write a formal email to a director of a company and an informal email to
a workmate. Send both emails for your tutor to check.
Summary
Nesta aula toda redigida em inglês abordamos a linguagem formal e informal que pode ser
utilizada em contextos diferentes no ambiente de trabalho. Você estudou, através da leitura de
exemplos e da solução de alguns exercícios, como escrever cartas e e-mails.
Dúvidas sobre uma palavra ou outra do vocabulário podem surgir. Caso aconteça, lembre-se
de comunicar ao seu tutor e também de consultar o dicionário, seu melhor amigo (aproveite e
consulte a pronúncia também!). Estude, pratique, faça as atividades. Como homework você vai testar
seu conhecimento sobre as linguagens formal e informal no site
http://esl.about.com/library/quiz/bl_business_level_test.htm.
See you! Goodbye!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Beare, Kenneth (esl.about.com website). English as 2nd Language – Guide to Basic Business
Letters. Online. Disponível em: http://esl.about.com/cs/onthejobenglish/a/a_basbletter.htm. Acesso
em: 04 jan. 2011.
Beare, Kenneth (esl.about.com website). English as 2nd Language – Business English Level Test.
Online. Disponível em: http://esl.about.com/library/quiz/bl_business_level_test.htm. Acesso em: 04
jan. 2011.
TheEnglishWeb.com. Business Writing Skills – How to Write an Email. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.theenglishweb.com/business-writing-skills/how-to-write-an-email.php. Acesso em: 04
jan. 2011.
WhiteSmoke.com. 5 Tips for Better Business Emails. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.whitesmoke.com/5-tips-for-better-business-emails. Acesso em: 04 jan. 2011.
WhiteSmoke.com. Business Writing. Online. Disponível em: http://www.whitesmoke.com/business-
writing.html. Acesso em: 04 jan. 2011.
WhiteSmoke.com. How to Write a Business Email. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.whitesmoke.com/how-to-write-a-business-email. Acesso em: 04 jan. 2011.
Unidade 4 – Uso do Inglês como Ferramenta de Negociação
Business English
• 28th Lesson
Talking on the Phone
Leaving and Taking Messages
Aim
Our aim is to prepare you to talk about business and solve problems on the telephone.
Introduction
Hello! How are things?
In this lesson we are approaching phone talks, how to leave and take a message in an
answering machine, how to talk on the phone in business contexts and so on.
Are you ready? It’s time to go!
Tips and Vocabulary
Telephone Tips
• Speak slowly and clearly
Listening to someone speaking in a second language over the telephone can be very
challenging because you cannot see the person you are trying to hear. However, it may be even more
difficult for the person you are talking with to understand you. You may not realize that your
pronunciation isn't clear because your teacher and students know and understand you. Pay special
attention to "r's" and "l's" or "b's" and "v's" when you are on the phone. If you are nervous about
using the phone in English, you may notice yourself speaking very quickly. Practice or write down
what you are going to say (…).
• Make sure you understand the other speaker
Don't pretend to understand (não finja entender) everything you hear over the telephone.
Even native speakers ask each other to repeat and confirm information from time to time. This is
especially important if you are taking a message for someone else. (…) Don't be afraid to remind the
person to slow down more than once. Keep your telephone in an area that is away from other noise
distractions such as a radio or television.
• Practice with a friend
Ask another student to practice talking on the phone with you. You might choose one night a
week and take turns phoning each other at a certain time. Try to talk for at least fifteen minutes. You
can talk socially, or role play different scenarios in a business environment. (…)
• Use businesses and recordings
There are many ways to get free telephone English practice. After business hours, you can
call and listen to recorded messages. Write down what you hear the first time, and then call back and
check if your notes are precise. (…) Make sure you have a pen handy so that you can repeat the
information and check your comprehension.
• Learn telephone etiquette (manners)
The way that you speak to your best friend on the phone is very different to the way you
should speak to someone in a business setting. Many ESL speakers make the mistake of being too
direct on the telephone. It is possible that the person on the other line will think that you are being
rude on purpose if you don't use formal language in certain situations. Sometimes just one word such
as "could" or "may" is necessary in order to sound polite. (…) Take the time to learn how to answer
the phone and say goodbye in a polite manner, as well as all the various ways one can start and end a
conversation casually.
• Practice dates and numbers
It only takes a short time to memorize English Phonetic Spelling, but it is something that you
will be able to use in any country. You should also practice saying dates and numbers aloud. (…)
Talking on the telephone can be difficult for a couple of reasons. First of all, you can't
see the person you're talking to, so you can't see his or her body language and "read" his or her face.
Talking on the phone also requires its own special set of words and phrases. Here’s a helpful
reference chart that will help you speak on the telephone phone with confidence in business and
personal situations. We hope you'll find this helpful.
SITUATION EXAMPLES
Introducing yourself. Phrases to use when you place the call.
When calling a general number: - May I speak with Marina Smith? - Hello, this is John Block calling for Marina Smith. - Is Marina Smith in? (informal) When the person answers the call directly: - Hi Marina, it’s John calling. (informal) - Good afternoon, Marina. This is John Block from ABC company calling. - Hi, it's Gerry from the dentist's office here.
Answering the phone. There are many different ways to answer your phone.
For calls to your direct line: - Hello? (informal) - Good morning, this is Marina. - Good afternoon, XYZ firm. How may I help you? - XYZ firm, Marina speaking. - Thank you for calling Boyz Autobody. Jody speaking. How can I help you? - Doctor's office. For calls to your direct line, when the person asks for you by name: - Speaking (caller says: “Is Marina there?” and Marina replies: “speaking”). - This is she / this is he (caller says: “Is Marina in?” and Marina replies “This is she”). *The person answering says this if the caller does not recognize their voice. For calls to a general number: - Thank you for calling XYZ. How may I direct your call?
Connecting someone. When you answer the phone and it is for somebody else.
- Is Fred in? (informal) - Is Jackson there, please? (informal) - Can I talk to your sister? (informal) - May I speak with Mr. Green, please? - Would the doctor be in/available?
When you need to put somebody on hold
- Jim is on another line at the moment. Would you like to hold? - I’m sorry, I have a call on my other line. Can you please hold? - Please hold and I’ll put you through. - Let me see if Jim is available. - One moment, please. - Hang on a minute. (informal) - Just a sec. I'll get him. (informal) For customer service calls - All of our operators are currently busy. Please stand by for the next available operator. - One minute, I’ll transfer you now.
When you don’t understand the caller - Could you please repeat that? - I’m sorry, I didn’t catch what you just said. - Can you please speak a little more slowly? - Can you please speak a little louder? - Can you call me back? I think we have a bad connection.
Clarifying what your caller says
- Can you please spell that for me? - How do you spell your last name? - And that company name again was, JAQ Industries? - Let me repeat your information to make sure I got it right. - Would you mind spelling that for me?
- Did you say 555 Charles St.? - You said your name was John, right?
Taking a message for someone
- Sammy's not in. Who's this? (informal) - I'm sorry, John’s not here at the moment. Can I take a message? - John is in a meeting at the moment. May I ask who’s calling? - John is at lunch. Would you like to leave a message? - John has left for the day. Would you like to be put through to his voice mail? - I'll let him know you called. - I'll make sure she gets the message.
Leaving a message for someone - Please tell him that Susan called and ask him to call me back. My number is 999-343-3423. - Please ask him to call Susan when he gets in. He already has my number. - He’s not in? Please put me through to his voice mail. - When do you expect him back in the office? - I need to speak with him on an urgent matter. Please have him call me as soon as he gets in. - Yes, can you tell him his wife called, please. - Thanks, could you ask him to call Brian when he gets in? - Thanks. My number is 222-3456, extension 12.
Ending a conversation - It’s been great talking with you. I’ve got a meeting now so I better run. - Thanks for calling. I’ll speak with you again soon. - I’ve got another call coming in. Good talking to you. - It’s 5 o’clock already. I better let you go. - Well, I guess I better get going. Talk to you soon. - Thanks for calling. Bye for now. - I'm afraid that's my other line. I'll talk to you again soon. Bye.
SPECIAL SITUATIONS
Leaving a voice mail - Hello, this is Marina Smith calling to follow-up regarding your order with XYZ company. Can you please call me back at 999-344-3344. - Hello, this is John Block from ABC. I’m calling regarding the upcoming conference in Miami. I’ll try you again later. - Hi, it’s Marina. Please call me back when you get a minute. (informal) - Hey Mikako. It's Yuka. Call me! (informal) - Hello, this is Ricardo calling for Luke. Could you please return my call as soon as possible? My number is 334-5689. Thank you. - Hello, Maxwell. This is Marina from the doctor's office
Recording a voice mail message on your machine
- Hello, you’ve reached Marina Smith at XYZ company. I’m sorry I’m not available to take your call. Please leave a message and I’ll call you back as soon as I can. Thank you. - Hello, you’ve reached John Block at ABC. I will be out of the office all day. I will be checking my voice mail from time to time and will return all urgent calls. Thank you. - Hi, this is Elizabeth. I'm sorry, I'm not available to take your call at this time. Leave me a message and I'll get back to you as soon as I can. If you’re going on vacation - Hello, this is Marina Smith at the XYZ company. I will be on vacation from Friday, May 12 through Monday, May 22. Please, leave a message, and I’ll call you back when I return. Thank you.
Phrases for cell phone calls The fading signal - I’m sorry, I’m losing you. Can you call me back? - I can barely hear you. Let me call you back on my other phone. - We’re breaking up. I’m having trouble hearing you. Let me call you back later. The lost call - Hi, it’s Marina again. Apparently we got cut off. - Hi, it’s John again. Sorry I lost you. My cell phone dropped the signal.
SPELLING OUT NAMES OVER THE PHONE. Often you will need to spell something out over the telephone, such as a last name. It will help your listener is you offer words for each letter. Give words or names that are very common for each letter.
- My last name is Czarnek. C as in cat, Z as in zebra, A as in apple, R as in Robert, N as in Nancy, e as in egg, K as in king. - My registration number is 459N4AF. That’s 459, N as in Nancy, 4 A as in Apple, F as in Frank.
Source: http://www.eslmania.com/students/business_english/Telephone.htm
Reading, Listening & Speaking
1) Take a look at the two examples of phone calls below:
Phone Call 1
— Hi, can I speak to Martin, please?
— Sorry, he’s out at the moment.
Can I take a message?
— Can you tell him that Natasha called?
— OK, Natasha. I’ll let him know when he
gets back.
Phone Call 2
— Hello?
— Hi, is that Tanya? It’s Amy here.
— Hi, Amy! Sorry, the battery on my
mobile is about to run out.
Can you call me on the landline?
— Sure, what’s the number?
— It’s 258 440.
(= two five eight, double four oh)
Finishing an informal call
...
— OK, then. So I’ll see you next Saturday
at 7 o’clock. I’m looking forward to it.
— Yeah, me too. See you on Saturday,
then. Thanks for calling.
— No problem. Bye!
...
— Right, then, I’ll find out how much the
tickets cost and get back to you.
— Thanks, that would be great. Speak to
you later. Bye!
— Good morning, could I speak to Dr.
McSweeney, please?
— Yes, of course. May I ask who’s calling?
— It’s Nigel Briggs.
— OK, just a moment, please.
I’ll put you through.
…
— Hello, Mr. Briggs? I’m afraid she’s on the
other line at the moment.
Shall I ask her to call you back?
— No, that’s OK. I’ll phone again later.
Thank you. Goodbye.
— Good morning, this is Helen Randall.
Could I talk to Simon Hooper, please?
— I’m afraid he’s away from his desk
at the moment. Would you like to leave
a message?
— Yes, please. Could you ask him to call
me when he gets back? My number is...
2) Which call is:
a. Formal?______
b. Informal? ______[m3] Comentário: Os dois
telefonemas se misturaram na
página. Tentei separar de novo.
Será que está correto? Verifique,
por favor.
3) There are a number of phrases and idioms that are only used when telephoning. Let's
first take a look at an example dialogue: Here are the most common:
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
Operator: Hello, Frank and Brothers, How can I help you? _Answering the phone_
Peter: This is Peter Jackson. Can I have extension 3421? ___________________
Operator: Certainly, hold on a minute, I'll put you through... ___________________
Frank: Bob Peterson's office, Frank speaking. ___________________
Peter: This is Peter Jackson calling, is Bob in? ___________________
Frank: I'm afraid he's out at the moment. Can I take a message? ___________________
Peter: Yes, Could you ask him to call me at. I need to talk to him about the Nuovo line, it's urgent.
___________________
Frank: Could you repeat the number please? ___________________
Peter: Yes, that's, and this is Peter Jackson. ___________________
Frank: Thank you, Mr. Jackson, I'll make sure Bob gets this asap. ___________________
Peter: Thanks, bye. ___________________
Frank: Bye.
4) Use the spaces in the phone conversation above to name the parts of the dialogue
according to the chart with vocabulary. There’s an example.
5) Put the phone conversation below in the correct order. Use numbers.
____ Bye.
____ Hello.
____ Do you know when she'll be back?
____ O.K. I'll give her the message.
____ Hello. May I speak to Sara?
____ Thanks. Good-bye.
____ Yes, ask her to call Sylvia. My number is 377-6194.
____ No, I don't. Would you like to leave a message?
____ I'm sorry, she's not home now.
Adapted from: http://esl.about.com/od/businessspeakingskills/a/t_vocab.htm
Business Phone Call - Interactive Practice
6) Now, we are going to follow a weblink for you to listen and practice your “phone skills”.
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation,
become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the
audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for
Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause
between each sentence is too fast for you. The links is:
http://www.talkenglish.com/LessonPractice.aspx?ALID=483
Dialogue 1
A: "Hello? This is Steve."
B: "Hi Steve, this is Mary from ABC Company. I'm returning your call."
A: "Hi Mary. How are you doing?"
B: "I'm doing great, thanks."
A: "Thanks for returning my call. I couldn't figure out why the ending balance on fiscal year 2003
didn't match the beginning balance on of 2004."
B: "When I checked, it was matching. How much is the difference?"
A: "The amount is exactly $42,000."
B: "Oh. I know what the problem is. We opened another bank account at the end of fiscal year 2003.
I might not have included the new bank statements when I sent over the information."
A: "That makes sense. I'm just glad it wasn't out of my miscalculation. Can you send over the
statements? I should be done by end of day since everything looks good."
B: "Sure. I'll fax them to you immediately. Is 555-123-4567 the number I should fax it to?"
A: "Yes. That is the correct number."
B: "I'll do it right now."
A: "Thank you for your help."
B: "I should have sent them over to you the first time. I apologize for that."
A: "No problem."
B: "Thank you."
A: "Thank you. Bye."
Dialogue 2
A: "Hello, ABC Company."
B: "Hi, this is Janet from Consult R Us. May I speak with Alex, please?"
A: "He's in a meeting right now. Would you like to leave a message?"
B: "Yes. Can you have Alex call me back when he is available? My name again is Janet, and he can
reach me at 555-987-6543."
A: "It's Janet at 555-987-6543. Can I tell him what this is regarding?"
B: "He sent over a fax, and the last page didn't print out. I will need for him to resend the fax to me."
A: "I'll let him know."
B: "Thank you."
A: "Thank you for calling ABC."
B: "Good bye."
A: "Bye."
Dialogue 3
A: "Microsoft, this is Steve."
B: "Hi, Steve, this is Richard from Third Hand Testing. I'm calling in regards to the MSN
assignment. Do you have a minute to answer a couple of questions?"
A: "Sure. What can I help you with?"
B: "We originally agreed on 5 testing procedures, but our program manager received a mail
indicating 4 testing procedures. Is 4 the correct number?"
A: "Yes, it is. We found that we can do the last one here."
B: "Great. Does the timeline change because we reduced one of the testing procedures?"
A: "We don't have to change the timeline. Our original timeframe was very aggressive."
B: "That makes our job a little easier."
A: "Do you have any other questions?"
B: "No. That's all I had. Thanks for your time."
A: "No problem."
B: "Ok. Good bye."
A: "Bye."
Summary
Na aula de hoje você viu, por meio de vários exemplos, como falar e como se comportar ao
telefone em inglês. Espero que sirva como aprendizado e base para o seu estudo. Além disso, para
que você pratique mais um pouco, deixo o link de um Quiz onde você vai testar o seu conhecimento
sobre phone conversations. Faça os exercícios, pesquise e se informe sobre os tópicos aqui
abordados. Este será seu homework.
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/business/talkingbusiness/unit1telephone/challeng
e.shtml
See you!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
BBC.co.uk. Learning English – Telephone Challenge. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/business/talkingbusiness/unit1telephone/challeng
e.shtml. Acesso em: 05 jan. 2011.
Beare, Kenneth. (esl.about.com website). English as 2nd Language – Business Speaking Skills,
Telephone Vocabulary. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/od/businessspeakingskills/a/t_vocab.htm. Acesso em: 05 jan. 2011.
EslMania.com. Business English - Telephone. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.eslmania.com/students/business_english/Telephone.htm. Acesso em: 04 jan. 2011.
TalkEnglish.com. Lesson practice Vocabulary – Business Phone Call, Interactive Practice. Online.
Disponível em: http://www.talkenglish.com/LessonPractice.aspx?ALID=483. Acesso em: 05 jan.
2011.
Unidade 4 – Uso do Inglês como Ferramenta de Negociação
Business English
• 29th Lesson
In a Meeting
Talking about projects
Introduction
Hello! How are you doing?
It’s time to talk about meetings! Do you like them? They often have the purpose of solving
problems. So, let’s study this vocabulary and get some new information!
Let’s start!
Vocabulary
Aim
Learning about meetings. We are going to see dialogues and situations in this context.
1) First of all you are going to watch a video about meetings with some new vocabulary
and information. Watch it at http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6mTu9y2fsT8 .
2) Now that you have seen the video, answer:
a. What types of meetings do you usually attend? ______________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
b. What’s the role of the chairperson?
- before the meeting: _______________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
- during the meeting: _______________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
- after the meeting: ________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Useful English Phrases for Participating in a Business Meeting
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
• Opening the Meeting
Good morning/afternoon, everyone.
If we are all here, let's
. . . get started (OR)
… start the meeting. (OR)
. . . start.
• Welcoming and Introducing
Participants
Please, join me in welcoming (name of
participant)
We're pleased to welcome (name of
participant)
It's a pleasure to welcome (name of
participant)
I'd like to introduce (name of participant)
I don't think you've met (name of participant)
• Stating the Principal Objectives of a
Meeting
We're here today to
Our aim is to ...
I've called this meeting in order to ...
By the end of this meeting, I'd like to have ...
• Giving Apologies for Someone Who
is Absent
I'm afraid.., (name of participant) can't be with
us today. She is in...
I have received apologies for the absence of
(name of participant), who is in (place).
• Reading the Minutes (Notes) of the
Last Meeting
First, let's go over the report from the last
meeting, which was held on (date)
Here are the minutes from our last meeting,
which was on (date)
• Dealing with Recent Developments
Jack, can you tell us how the XYZ project is
progressing?
Jack, how is the XYZ project coming along?
John, have you completed the report on the
new accounting package?
Has everyone received a copy of the Tate
Foundation report on current marketing
trends?
• Moving Forward
So, if there is nothing else we need to discuss,
let's move on to today's agenda.
Shall we get down to business?
Is there any other business?
If there are no further developments, I'd like to
move on to today's topic.
• Introducing the Agenda
Have you all received a copy of the agenda?
There are three items on the agenda. First,
shall we take the points in this order?
If you don't mind, I'd like to ... go in order
(OR)
Skip item 1 and move on to item 3
I suggest we take item 2 last.
• Allocating Roles (secretary,
participants)
(name of participant) has agreed to take the
minutes.
(name of participant) has kindly agreed to give
us a report on this matter.
(name of participant) will lead point 1, (name
of participant) point 2, and (name of
participant) point 3. (name of participant),
would you mind taking notes today?
• Agreeing on the Ground Rules for
the Meeting
(contributions, timing, decision-making, etc.)
We will hear a short report on each point first,
followed by a discussion round the table.
I suggest we go round the table first.
The meeting is due to finish at...
We'll have to keep each item to ten minutes.
Otherwise we'll never get through.
We may need to vote on item 5, if we can't get
a unanimous decision.
• Introducing the First Item on the
Agenda
So, let's start with
Shall we start with. .
So, the first item on the agenda is
Pete, would you like to kick off?
Martin, would you like to introduce this item?
• Closing an Item
I think that covers the first item.
Shall we leave that item?
If nobody has anything else to add,
• Next Item
Let's move onto the next item
The next item on the agenda is
Now we come to the question of.
• Giving Control to the Next
Participant
I'd like to hand over to Mark, who is going to
lead the next point.
Right, Dorothy, over to you.
• Summarizing
Before we close, let me just summarize the
main points.
To sum up, ...
In brief,
Shall I go over the main points?
• Finishing Up
Right, it looks as though we've covered the
main items.
Is there any other business?
• Suggesting and Agreeing on Time,
Date and Place for the Next Meeting
Can we fix the next meeting, please?
So, the next meeting will be on... (day), the . . .
(date) of.. . (month) at...
What about the following Wednesday? How is
that?
So, see you all then.
• Thanking Participants for Attending
I'd like to thank Marianne and Jeremy for
coming over from London.
Thank you all for attending.
Thanks for your participation.
• Closing the Meeting
The meeting is closed.
I declare the meeting closed.
Source:
http://esl.about.com/cs/onthejobenglish/a/a_runmeet.ht
m
More Useful Meeting Phrases
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
• Interrupting
May I have a word?
If I may, I think...
Excuse me for interrupting.
May I come in here?
• Giving Opinions
I (really) feel that...
In my opinion...
The way I see things...
If you ask me,... I tend to think that...
• Asking for Opinions
Do you (really) think that... ?
(name of participant) can we get your input?
How do you feel about...?
• Commenting on Other Opinions
I never thought about it that way before.
Good point!
I get your point.
I see what you mean.
• Agreeing with Other Opinions
Exactly!
That's (exactly) the way I feel.
I have to agree with (name of participant).
• Disagreeing with Other Opinions
Up to a point I agree with you, but...
(I'm afraid) I can't agree
• Advising and Suggesting
We should...
Why don't you...?
How/What about...
I suggest/recommend that...
• Clarifying
Have I made that clear?
Do you see what I'm getting at?
Let me put this another way...
I'd just like to repeat that...
• Requesting Information
I'd like you to...
Would you mind... I wonder if you could...
• Asking for Repetition
I didn't catch that. Could you repeat that,
please?
I missed that. Could you say it again, please?
Could you run that by me one more time?
• Asking for Clarification
I'm afraid I don't quite understand what you
are getting at.
Could you explain to me how that is going to
work?
I don't see what you mean. Could we have
some more details, please?
• Asking for Verification
Do you mean that...?
Is it true that...?
• Asking for Spelling
Would you mind spelling that for me, please?
• Asking for Contributions for Other
Participants
What do you think about this proposal?
Would you like to add anything, (name of
participant)?
Has anyone else got anything to contribute?
Are there any more comments?
• Correcting Information
Sorry, that's not quite right.
I'm afraid you don't understand what I'm
saying.
That's not quite what I had in mind.
That's not what I meant.
• Keeping the Meeting on Time
Well, that seems to be all the time we have
today.
Please be brief.
I'm afraid we've run out of time.
I'm afraid that's outside the scope of this
meeting.
Let's get back on track, why don't we?
That's not really why we're here today.
Why don't we return to the main focus of
today's meeting.
We'll have to leave that to another time.
We're beginning to lose sight of the main
point.
Keep to the point, please.
I think we'd better leave that for another
meeting.
Are we ready to make a decision?
Fonte: http://esl.about.com/cs/onthejobenglish/a/a_meetphrases.htm
Reading & Listening
HOW TO BEHAVE IN A MEETING
Politeness
If you are interrupting or disagreeing with people, it is even more
important to be polite: your views are more likely to be respected if you
present them in a professional and non-confrontational (non-argumentative)
way. There are several ways to make what you say sound more polite and less confrontational.
• Use 'can' or 'could'.
'Sean, can I just ask you…?' or 'If you could go through them in order…' Both expressions above are
more polite than simply saying 'I want to know…' or 'Go through them in order…'
• Use 'would like'
'…I'd like to be with other editors…' or 'I would like to be able to show her drawings…' This
sounds much more polite than 'I want…'
• Say 'sorry'
'I'm sorry, but I really strongly disagree…' or 'Sorry to hold the meeting up'. This is a very common
way to 'soften' what you say. By saying sorry you are not really apologizing for what you say - using
'sorry' is telling the listener: 'I'm going to say or do something you might not like, so please don’t get
upset'.
• Use 'just'
'I just wanted to see…' or 'Sean, can I just ask you…?'. The word 'just' gives the listener a message
that you are not asking them to deal with something difficult or time-consuming; that it is not going
to be a problem.
Use 'I think' or 'I feel'
'I do feel quite strongly that we're
bringing this out too soon…' or 'I don’t
think we’ve got any choice…'. These
phrases have the effect of softening
what they are saying, by presenting their ideas as opinions, not orders or instructions.
• Acknowledge people
'Ok ay everybody, ….' '…as you can see…' or 'Yeah Sean, ….' It's important to acknowledge the
other people in the meeting, by using their names, or words like 'you', 'we', 'everybody', 'my
colleagues' etc. If you don’t use these words and expressions, you may give people the impression
that you are rather detached and/or authoritarian.
Preparing for meetings
Participating in meetings which are conducted in a foreign language can be nerve-wracking –
people may speak very quickly, they may use words that you do not understand, they may have
strong accents, or they may talk about topics which are outside your area of expertise.
All these factors can make meetings difficult, but if you prepare for meetings by studying the
agenda, researching the topics that are likely to be discussed, and preparing vocabulary that you
think you might need during the meeting, you will feel more confident and your performance in the
meeting will be better.
Adapted from: http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/business/talkingbusiness/unit2meetings/expert.shtml
1) Read the General Statements about Meetings below:
"I have to go. I have a meeting I'm late for."
"I have to go to a meeting now. I'll talk to you later."
"I forgot about my 1:00 meeting. I don't have much time for lunch."
"I'll finish the feedback form after my meeting."
"I'll be in meetings all day today."
"I have five meetings today, so I won't have time to help you with this now. Let's set up a time for
tomorrow."
"The meeting went an hour over."
"The meeting was canceled."
"The meeting started 15 minutes late."
"George didn't arrive to the meeting on time."
"We finished late because John had problems with his computer during the presentation portion of
the meeting."
"Are you going to the company meeting next week?"
"Can you set up a meeting for our brainstorm session?"
"My calendar looks pretty clear on Thursday. Set up a meeting for that day."
2) Now, go to http://www.talkenglish.com/LessonDetails.aspx?ALID=477 , click on the
sentences and repeat them.
3) Practice more by clicking on the “Audio” Button at
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/business/talkingbusiness/unit2meetings/1
agenda.shtml and listen to the conversation. After your finish reading and listening, take
the quiz at the end of the page.
Reading & Reading Comprehension
1) Read this conversation about a meeting.
Tomorrow's Meeting
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
Alice: We're having a meeting tomorrow. Can you make it?
Kevin: When is it taking place?
Alice: We're planning on 10 o'clock. Is that OK?
Kevin: Yes, that'll be fine.
Alice: We're going to go over last quarter's sales figures.
Kevin: Good. I have some input I'd like to make.
Alice: Frank is also going to make some suggestions on improving the bottom line.
Kevin: That'll be interesting. He's got keen insights.
Alice: Yes, he's going to outline some new sales strategies.
Kevin: Is Alan attending?
Alice: No, he's flying to San Francisco and won't be able to make it.
Kevin: Oh well, maybe He'll phone in.
Key vocabulary*: If you don’t understand, look up these words in a dictionary or check with
your tutor.
to make a meeting
to take place
sales figures
quarter
bottom line
insight
strategy
to phone in
Adapted from: http://esl.about.com/od/businessreading/a/d_meet.htm
[m4] Comentário: Não seria
conveniente colocar a tradução
dessas palavras-chave?
2) Now, don’t look at the conversation above, try to remember and answer these multiple
choice questions:
a. When is the meeting?
( ) Next Monday at 10
( )Tomorrow at 10
( ) This afternoon
b. What's the subject of the meeting?
( ) The San Francisco accounts
( ) Last quarter's sales figures
( ) This year's budget
c. What type of suggestions will Frank
make?
( ) Improving research
( ) Improving the bottom line
( ) Sales on the east coast
d. What is Frank going to outline?
( ) Keen insights
( ) New sales strategies
( ) San Francisco partners
e. Who isn't going to attend?
( ) Kevin
( ) Frank
( ) Alan
Summary
Na aula de hoje tivemos como tema as reuniões, mas em inglês. Você viu
vocabulário com o qual você já deve estar acostumado a lidar em português, porém de
uma forma diferente. Você analisou exemplos de frases e de diálogos em conversas
entre empresários no ambiente de trabalho. Com esses exemplos, é preciso que você
pratique, converse com um amigo, vizinho, parente, com softwares de computador, pela
internet, enfim, ferramentas não faltam! O seu homework de hoje está no site:
http://www.englishmedialab.com/listening/Business%20briefing%20.htm no qual você
vai ouvir uma conversation e responder a perguntas sobre essa atividade de listening.
Have a nice time studying!
See you next class!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
BBC.co.uk. Learning English – Meetings, Agenda Setting. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/business/talkingbusiness/unit2meeti
ngs/1agenda.shtml. Acesso em 13 jan. 2011.
BBC.co.uk. Learning English – Meetings, Language Expert. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/business/talkingbusiness/unit2meeti
ngs/expert.shtml . Acesso em 13 jan. 2011.
Beare, Kenneth (esl.about.com website). English as 2nd Language – Tomorrow’s
Meeting. Online. Disponível em: http://esl.about.com/od/businessreading/a/d_meet.htm.
Acesso em: 07 jan. 2011.
Beare, Kenneth (esl.about.com website). English as 2nd Language – Useful English
Phrases for Participating in a Business Meeting. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/cs/onthejobenglish/a/a_runmeet.htm. Acesso em: 07 jan. 2011.
Beare, Kenneth (esl.about.com website). English as 2nd Language – Useful Phrases
for Running a Business Meeting. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/cs/onthejobenglish/a/a_meetphrases.htm. Acesso em: 07 jan. 2011.
EnglishMediaLab.com. Business Briefing. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.englishmedialab.com/listening/Business%20briefing%20.htm. Acesso em:
07 jan. 2011.
TalkEnglish.com. Business English Lessons – General Statements. Online. Disponível
em: http://www.talkenglish.com/LessonDetails.aspx?ALID=477. Acesso em: 07 jan.
2011.
Youtube.com. Business English Meetings 1. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6mTu9y2fsT8. Acesso em: 07 jan. 2011.
Unidade 4 – Uso do Inglês como Ferramenta de Negociação
Business English
• 30th Lesson
Applying for a Job
A Job Interview
Introduction
Hello, my dear student! Good morning, good afternoon, good evening!
This lesson is very important for your future as a business (wo)man. You will
learn how to apply for a position in a company in English.
Good luck!
Vocabulary
EMPLOYMENT – WORK
Assessment Evaluation of one's abilities
Apply Submit an application for a job or position
Background Education - qualifications - experience
Bonus Additional payment to an employee as an incentive or reward
Curriculum Vitae
Summary of one's education and experience to date; résumé
Dismiss Discharge from employment; (to fire, to sack, to let go)
Employee Person who works for a firm or company
Employer Person or firm who employs people
Fire To dismiss from a job.
Fringe benefits Advantages offered in addition to salary (life insurance, retirement scheme, company car, etc.). Also called "perks", abbreviation for perquisites.
Interview Oral examination of an applicant for employment
Aim
Preparing for a very important
business situation, an appliance for a job.
Make redundant
Dismiss for economic reasons
Maternity leave Period of absence for a female employee when having a baby
Notice Advance warning of intention to leave one's job - to give or hand in one's resignation
Personnel People who work for a firm or company (employees)
Personnel officer
Manager responsible for recruitment, training and welfare of personnel (employees)
Promotion Advancement in rank or position in the company
Prospects Opportunities for success or promotion in a career
Recruit Look for and hire personnel
Resign Leave a job voluntarily
Retire Leave employment because of age
Sick leave Absence because of illness - to be on sick leave
Staff People who work for a firm or department; employees
Strength Strong characteristic or particular ability
Strike To go on strike: to stop working in protest against something
Take on Employ or hire
Trainee Person being trained for a job e.g. a trainee salesman
Training course
A course of study to prepare for a job e.g. a computer course
Unemployment benefits
Payments made by the state to an unemployed person
Vacancy A position to be filled
Weakness A lack of ability or a shortcoming in character
INTERVIEW QUESTIONS
Preparation for an interview is essential. The list of questions below is designed
to serve as a guide so that you are not taken by surprise!
1 Tell me about yourself.
2 How would you describe yourself? (character/personality)
3 What are your strengths/weaknesses?
4 Are you married? Single? Do you have a partner?
5 What do you do in your free time? What are your hobbies? / Do you have any hobbies?
6 Why are you interested in working for our company? Why do you want to work for this company?
7 What type of position do you think you are suited for / would suit you?
8 How would you describe the position we have to offer?
9 What aspects of the position are you most / least interested in?
10 What would you like to find in this job that you didn't have in your previous job?
11 How do you think you could develop the position? What would be your strategy to develop the position?
12 What have you got to offer us? What could you contribute to our company?
13 Why do you want to leave your present job? Why do you want to change jobs?
14 What were you responsible for? What did your job involve?
15 What do you think you gained by working in your last job?
16 What do you think of your (last) boss?
17
What are your salary requirements? How much would you hope to earn in this position? How much do you think you should be offered for this position? What salary would you expect (to be offered) for this position?
18 Have you received any offers of a job?
19 Why have you had to look for a job for so long? Why have you been looking for a job for so long? Why did it take you so long to find a new job?
20 How do you feel about your future in the profession?
21 Have you had any failures? / What failures have you had? Have you had any negative experiences?
22 What sort of obstacles have you come across/encountered in your work?
23 If you had to recruit colleagues, what qualities would you look for?
24 Would you be willing to relocate/to move to another part of the country/ to work abroad? Did you have to travel abroad in your last job?
25 Don't you think you have too much experience/you are over-qualified for this job?
26 How long do you think you would stay with us? If we offered you the job, how long would you expect to stay with us?
27 Which do you prefer: to work alone or in a team? Do you prefer working alone or with other people as part of a team?
28 Do you know how to manage a team? Are you capable of leading a team? Do you think you have the ability to be a team leader?
29 Why should I recruit you? How could you persuade me to recruit you?
30 Do you have any comments to make, or questions to ask?
Reading, Listening & Watching
1) First of all, watch this video at the website ‘Many Things’ with some
vocabulary and tips for a job interview http://www.manythings.org/b/e/15 :
2) Now that you know some new words for a job interview, read the following
text about job interview questions and answers with comments and tips to
help you.
Common Interview Questions
By Kenneth Beare, About.com Guide
• First Impressions
The first impression you make on the interviewer can decide the rest of the
interview. It is important that you introduce yourself, shake hands, and be friendly and
polite. The first question is often a "breaking the ice" type of question. 'Breaking the ice'
is an important way to begin the job interview, but it shouldn't take too long. Generally,
job interviewers will break the ice to help you feel comfortable. Make sure to give
positive, but not too detailed answers to these 'ice breakers'. Don't be surprised if the
interviewer asks you something like:
- How are you today?
- Did you have any trouble finding us?
- Isn't this great weather we're having?
This type of question is common because the interviewer wants to put you at
ease (help you relax). The best way to respond is in a short, friendly manner without
going into too much detail. Here are some examples correct responses:
Interviewer: How are you today?
You: I'm fine, thank you. And you?
OR
Interviewer: Did you have any trouble finding us?
You: No, the office isn't too difficult to find.
OR Interviewer: Isn't this great weather we're having?
You: Yes, it's wonderful. I love this time of year. (…)
• Referrals
Sometimes, you may have found about a job opportunity through a referral. If
this is the case, make sure to use the referral to your best advantage by mentioning it at
the beginning of the interview.
Comments: Mention the name of the referral at the beginning of the interview. Ideally,
this should be done when asked about how you found the job opening. Provide the name
of the referral. Don't go into too much detail about the relationship, unless asked. Give
the name of the referral only once. Don't continue to repeat the name during the
interview. Don't assume the job interviewer knows the person you are mentioning.
• Getting Down to Business
Once the pleasant beginnings have finished, it's time to begin the real interview.
Here are a number of the most common questions that are asked during the interview.
There is an example of excellent replies given for each question. Following the
examples, you will find a comment describing the type of question and important things
to remember when answering that type of question.
Interviewer: Tell me about yourself.
Candidate: I was born and raised in Milan, Italy. I attended the University of Milan and
received my master's degree in Economics. I have worked for 12 years as a financial
consultant in Milan for various companies including Rossi Consultants, Quasar
Insurance and Sardi and Sons. I enjoy playing tennis in my free time and learning
languages.
(…) Comment: This question is meant as an introduction. Do not focus too specifically
on any one area. The above question will often be used to help the interviewer choose
what h/she would like to ask next. While it is important to give an overall impression of
who you are, make sure to concentrate on work related experience. (…) Work
experience is more important than education in most English speaking countries.
Interviewer: What type of position are you looking for?
Candidate: I'm interested in an entry level (beginning) position. (…)
Comment: You should be willing to take an entry level position in an English speaking
company as most of these companies expect non-nationals to begin with such a position.
In the United States, most companies provide many opportunities for growth, so don't
be afraid to start from the beginning!
Interviewer: Are you interested in a full-time or part-time position?
Candidate: I am more interested in a full-time position. However, I would also consider
a part-time position.
Comment: Make sure to leave open as many possibilities as possible. Say you are
willing to take any job, once the job has been offered you can always refuse if the job
does not interest you.
Interviewer: Can you tell me about your responsibilities at your last job?
Candidate: I advised customers on financial matters. After I consulted the customer, I
completed a customer inquiry form and catalogued the information in our database. I
then collaborated with colleagues to prepare the best possible package for the client.
The clients were then presented with a summarized report on their financial activities
that I formulated on a quarterly basis.
Comment: Notice the amount of detail necessary when you are talking about your
experience. One of the most common mistakes made by foreigners when discussing their
former employment is to speak too generally. The employer wants to know exactly what
you did and how you did it; the more detail you can give the more the interviewer knows
that you understand the type of work. Remember to vary your vocabulary when talking
about your responsibilities. Also, do not begin every sentence with "I".
Interviewer: What is your greatest strength?
Candidate: I work well under pressure. When there is a deadline (a time by which the
work must be finished), I can focus on the task at hand (current project) and structure
my work schedule well. I remember one week when I had to get 6 new customer reports
out by Friday at 5. I finished all the reports ahead of time without having to work
overtime.
Candidate: I am an excellent communicator. People trust me and come to me for advice.
One afternoon, my colleague was involved with a troublesome (difficult) customer who
felt he was not being served well. I made the customer a cup of coffee and invited both
my colleague and the client to my desk where we solved the problem together. (…)
Comment: This is not the time to be modest! Be confident and always give examples.
Examples show that you are not only repeating words you have learned, but actually do
possess that strength.
Interviewer: What is your greatest weakness?
Candidate: I am overzealous (work too hard) and become nervous when my co-workers
are not pulling their weight (doing their job). However, I am aware of this problem, and
before I say anything to anyone, I ask myself why the colleague is having difficulties.
Candidate: I tend to spend too much time making sure the customer is satisfied.
However, I began setting time-limits for myself If I noticed this happening.
Comment: This is a difficult question. You need to mention a weakness that is actually a
strength. Make sure that you always mention how you try to improve the weakness.
Interviewer: Why do you want to work for Smith and Sons?
Candidate: After following your firms progress for the last 3 years, I am convinced that
Smith and Sons are becoming one of the market leaders and I would like to be part of
the team.
Candidate: I am impressed by the quality of your products. I am sure that I would be a
convincing salesman because I truly believe that the Atomizer is the best product on the
market today.
Comment: Prepare yourself for this question by becoming informed about the company.
The more detail you can give, the better you show the interviewer that you understand
the company.
Interviewer: When can you begin?
Candidate: Immediately.
Candidate: As soon as you would like me to begin.
Comment: Show your willingness to work!
• Language
Relating your job experience and how it relates to the specific job for which you
are applying are the two most important tasks during any job interview. Make sure to
use lots of descriptive verbs and adjectives to describe your responsibilities.
Comment: Take some time to prepare descriptive sentences concerning your
responsibilities. Use a dictionary to improve your vocabulary selection.
The above questions represent some of the most basic questions asked on any
job interview in English. Probably the most important aspect of interviewing in English
is giving detail. As a speaker of English as a second language, you might be shy about
saying complicated things. However, this is absolutely necessary as the employer is
looking for an employee who knows his or her job. If you provide detail, the interviewer
will know that you feel comfortable in that job. Don't worry about making mistakes in
English. It is much better to make simple grammar mistakes and provide detailed
information about your experience than to say grammatically perfect sentences without
any real content!
Adapted from: http://esl.about.com/od/businessspeakingskills/a/j_interview2.htm
3) This is another video for you to watch in order to be prepared for a job
interview in English: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9O_vexk7iLU
4) Now that you've reviewed some basic interviewing technique, open this link
http://esl.about.com/od/jobinterviewing/a/Job-Interviewing-Listening-
Comprehension.htm in a new window and listen a few times to the job
interview listening selection. If you have difficulties understanding, go to
the next page to see a transcription of the job interview.
5) Read the transcript of the listening conversation
Interviewer (Ms Hanford): (opens door, shakes hands) Good morning…
Job Applicant (Mr. Anderson): Good morning, Joe Anderson, it's a pleasure to meet you
Ms Hanford.
Hanford: How do you do? Please take a seat. (Joe sits) It's quite the rainy day outside,
isn't it?
Anderson: Yes, luckily, you have a nice underground parking lot that helped me avoid
the worst of it. I must say this is an impressive building.
Hanford: Thank you, we like working here... Now, let's see. You've come to interview
for the position of e-commerce manager, haven't you?
Anderson: Yes, Peter Smith encouraged me to apply, and I think I'd be ideal for the
position.
Hanford: Oh. Peter… he's a great sysadmin, we like him a lot … Let's go over your
resume. Could you begin by telling me about your qualifications?
Anderson: Certainly. I've been working as the regional assistant director of marketing at
Simpco Northwest for the past year.
Hanford: And what did you do before that?
Anderson: Before that, I was a Simpco local branch manager in Tacoma.
Hanford: Well, I see you have done well at Simpco. Can you give me some more detail
about your responsibilities as assistant director?
Anderson: Yes, I've been in charge of in-house personnel training for our Internet
customer service reps over the past six months.
Hanford: Can you tell me a little bit about what you've been doing in your training?
Anderson: We've been working on improving customer satisfaction through an
innovative e-commerce solution which provides real-time chat service help to visitors to
the site.
Hanford: Interesting. Is there anything in particular you feel would be useful here at
Sanders Co.?
Anderson: I understand that you have been expanding your e-commerce to include
social networking features.
Hanford: Yes, that's correct.
Anderson: I think that my experience in customer relations via the Internet in real-time
puts me in the unique position of understanding what works and what doesn't.
Hanford: Yes, that does sound useful. What difficulties and challenges do you think we
might run into?
Anderson: Well, I think we'll continue to see consumers spend more of the shopping
dollars online. I've been studying how sales directly relate to customer satisfaction with
online services.
Hanford: Would you mind giving me a bit more detail on that?
Anderson: Sure ... if customers aren't satisfied with the service they receive online, they
won't come back. It's much easier to lose customers online. That's why you need to
make sure that you get it right the first time round.
Hanford: I can see you've learnt quite a lot in the short time you've been working in e-
commerce.
Anderson: Yes, it's an exciting field to be working in …
6) Finally, click on this link
http://www.englishmedialab.com/Quizzes/business/listening/job%20interview%
20listening.htm, listen to a business English job interview by clicking on the
“play” button and then answer the questions in the website.
Summary
Hoje tivemos nossa última aula, e quantas matérias estudamos neste semestre,
não? Algumas foram mais fáceis, outras mais complicadas... Na aula de hoje
encerramos um ciclo, e você chegou à etapa final do curso, na qual falamos sobre uma
entrevista de emprego em inglês. Espero que coloque em prática tudo que você leu, viu
e ouviu durante todas as nossas aulas. Por fim, espero ter colaborado com o seu
aprendizado e com sua formação profissional. O resto depende de você!
Make it worth and have a very successful career!
Bye bye!
Ana Célia Lima
REFERÊNCIAS
Beare, Kenneth (esl.about.com website). English as 2nd Language – Example Job
Interview Questions. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/od/businessspeakingskills/a/j_interview2.htm. Acesso em: 10 jan.
2011.
Beare, Kenneth (esl.about.com website). English as 2nd Language – Job Interviewing
Example, Listening Comprehension. Online. Disponível em:
http://esl.about.com/od/jobinterviewing/a/Job-Interviewing-Listening-
Comprehension.htm. Acesso em: 10 jan. 2011.
EnglishMediaLab.com. Business English – Job Interview Listening. Online.
Disponível em:
http://www.englishmedialab.com/Quizzes/business/listening/job%20interview%20listen
ing.htm. Acesso em: 11 jan. 2011.
ManyThings.org. ESL Videos – Job Interview. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.manythings.org/b/e/15. Acesso em: 11 jan. 2011.
Youtube.com. Job Interviewing Tips for English Learners. Online. Disponível em:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9O_vexk7iLU. Acesso em: 11 jan. 2011.